FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL 5G Module Computer

User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides information about components, network connection, power management, security, backing up, and more. Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Legal information Copyright 2022 HP Development Company, L.P. Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features might not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows is automatically updated, which is always enabled. High-speed internet and Microsoft account required. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. See http://www.windows.com. If your product ships with Windows in S Mode: Windows in S Mode works exclusively with apps from the Microsoft Store within Windows. Certain default settings, features, and apps cannot be changed. Some accessories and apps that are compatible with Windows may not work (including some antivirus, PDF writers, driver utilities, and accessibility apps), and performance may vary, even if you switch out of S Mode. If you switch to Windows, you cannot switch back to S Mode. Learn more at Windows.com/SmodeFAQ. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, Pentium, and Thunderbolt are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. NVIDIA and the NVIDIA logo are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. The microSD logo and microSD are trademarks of SD-3C LLC. USB Type-C and USB-C are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum. DisplayPort and the DisplayPort logo are trademarks owned by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) in the United States and other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Sound is a trademark of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved

. Second Edition: May 2022 First Edition: January 2022 Document Part Number: N05887-002 Safety warning notice Reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer by following the practices described. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. iii Processor configuration setting (select products only) Important information about processor configurations. IMPORTANT: Select computer products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. iv Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1Getting started.......................................................................................................................................................................1 Finding information ...........................................................................................................................................................1 2Components ...........................................................................................................................................................................3 Locating hardware .............................................................................................................................................................3 Locating software..............................................................................................................................................................3 Right...................................................................................................................................................................................3 Left.....................................................................................................................................................................................4 Display ...............................................................................................................................................................................5 Low blue light mode (select products only) ..............................................................................................................6 Keyboard area....................................................................................................................................................................8 Touchpad ...................................................................................................................................................................8 Touchpad settings .............................................................................................................................................8 Adjusting touchpad settings .....................................................................................................................8 Turning on the touchpad ...........................................................................................................................8 Touchpad components ......................................................................................................................................9 Lights .........................................................................................................................................................................9 Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader ..........................................................................................................11 Special keys .............................................................................................................................................................12 Action keys...............................................................................................................................................................13 Hot keys (select products only) ...............................................................................................................................15 Bottom .............................................................................................................................................................................15 Labels...............................................................................................................................................................................16 3Network connections ...........................................................................................................................................................19 Connecting to a wireless network ...................................................................................................................................19 Using the wireless controls .....................................................................................................................................19 Wireless button ...............................................................................................................................................19 Operating system controls..............................................................................................................................19 Connecting to a WLAN .............................................................................................................................................20 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) ................................................................................................20 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only)........................................................................................21 Connecting Bluetooth devices.........................................................................................................................21 Connecting to a wired network........................................................................................................................................21 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only)...........................................................................22 Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) ......................................................................................22 Using HP MAC Address Pass Through (select products only) .........................................................................................23 4Navigating the screen ..........................................................................................................................................................24 Using touchpad and touch screen gestures ....................................................................................................................24 Tap ...........................................................................................................................................................................24 v Two-finger pinch zoom............................................................................................................................................24 Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) .............................................................................................25 Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ...............................................................................................25 Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad).............................................................................................25 Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ...............................................................................................26 Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad).........................................................................................26 Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) ..................................................................................................................26 One-finger slide (touch screen)...............................................................................................................................27 Using an optional keyboard or mouse.............................................................................................................................27 Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only)......................................................................................................27 5Entertainment features .......................................................................................................................................................28 Using a camera (select products only) ............................................................................................................................28 Using audio ......................................................................................................................................................................28 Connecting speakers ...............................................................................................................................................28 Connecting headphones ..........................................................................................................................................28 Connecting headsets ..............................................................................................................................................29 Using sound settings ...............................................................................................................................................29 Viewing or changing sound settings ...............................................................................................................29 Using the control panel to view and control audio settings ...........................................................................29 Using video ......................................................................................................................................................................29 Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only)...............................................30 Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport.............................................................31 Connecting displays to computers with AMD or NVIDIA graphics (with an optional hub)..............................31 Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) ..............................................31 Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) ..................................................31 Using data transfer ..........................................................................................................................................................32 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ...........................................................................32 6Managing power...................................................................................................................................................................34 Using Sleep and Hibernation ..........................................................................................................................................34 Initiating and exiting Sleep......................................................................................................................................34 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) .......................................................................................35 Shutting down (turning off) the computer......................................................................................................................35 Using the Power icon ......................................................................................................................................................36 Running on battery power...............................................................................................................................................36 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only)...........................................................................................................36 Displaying battery charge .......................................................................................................................................36 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) ........................................................37 Conserving battery power .......................................................................................................................................37 Identifying low battery levels..................................................................................................................................37 Resolving a low battery level ..................................................................................................................................37 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available....................................................................38 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available..................................................................38 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ..................................................38 Factory-sealed battery............................................................................................................................................38 vi Running on external power .............................................................................................................................................38 7Security ................................................................................................................................................................................40 Protecting the computer .................................................................................................................................................40 Using passwords..............................................................................................................................................................41 Setting passwords in Windows ...............................................................................................................................41 Setting passwords in Computer Setup....................................................................................................................41 Managing a BIOS administrator password ..............................................................................................................42 Setting a new BIOS administrator password ..................................................................................................42 Changing a BIOS administrator password.......................................................................................................43 Deleting a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................................43 Entering a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................................44 Using DriveLock Security Options ...........................................................................................................................44 Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) ...................................................................................44 Enabling Automatic DriveLock ................................................................................................................44 Disabling Automatic DriveLock ...............................................................................................................45 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password ...........................................................................................45 Selecting manual DriveLock ............................................................................................................................45 Setting a DriveLock master password ....................................................................................................46 Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password ..........................................................................46 Disabling DriveLock .........................................................................................................................................47 Entering a DriveLock password.......................................................................................................................48 Changing a DriveLock password .....................................................................................................................48 Windows Hello (select products only) .............................................................................................................................48 Using antivirus software .................................................................................................................................................49 Using firewall software....................................................................................................................................................49 Installing software updates ............................................................................................................................................49 Using HP Client Security (select products only) ..............................................................................................................50 Using HP TechPulse (select products only) .....................................................................................................................50 Using an optional security cable (select products only) .................................................................................................50 Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) ...........................................................................................................50 8Maintenance.........................................................................................................................................................................51 Improving performance...................................................................................................................................................51 Using Disk Defragmenter ........................................................................................................................................51 Using Disk Cleanup ..................................................................................................................................................51 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ......................................................................................................51 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status ..............................................................................................................52 Updating programs and drivers ......................................................................................................................................52 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................................................52 Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only) .......................................................................................................52 Removing dirt and debris from your computer.......................................................................................................53 Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant ...........................................................................................................53 Caring for wood veneer (select products only) .......................................................................................................54 Traveling with or shipping your computer ......................................................................................................................54 vii 9Backing up, restoring, and recovering .................................................................................................................................56 Backing up information and creating recovery media ....................................................................................................56 Using Windows tools for backing up .......................................................................................................................56 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only)............................56 Restoring and recovering your system ...........................................................................................................................56 Creating a system restore .......................................................................................................................................57 Restoring and recovery methods ............................................................................................................................57 Recovering using HP Recovery media .....................................................................................................................57 Changing the computer boot order .........................................................................................................................58 Using HP Sure Recover (select products only) ........................................................................................................58 10Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start ..............................................................................................................59 Using Computer Setup.....................................................................................................................................................59 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup .........................................................................................................59 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup .......................................................................................................59 Updating the BIOS....................................................................................................................................................60 Determining the BIOS version .........................................................................................................................60 Preparing for a BIOS update ............................................................................................................................60 Downloading a BIOS update ....................................................................................................................61 Installing a BIOS update ..........................................................................................................................61 Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt .......................................................................................................61 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) .......................................................................................................................62 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) .....................................................................................................................62 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................................63 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) .............................................................................63 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code............................................................63 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows...................................................................................................63 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support (select products only)...........63 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant ..............................................64 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only) ....................64 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows .............................................................................................64 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP .........................................64 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) .......64 Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store..............................................65 Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ...................................................................................................65 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .........................................................................................................................65 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code ...................................................................65 Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI.............................................................................................................66 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive ....................................................................66 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ...............................................................66 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only)..........66 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) .........................................................67 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .......................................................................................67 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .................................................67 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ................................67 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings ..........................................................................67 viii 12Specifications.....................................................................................................................................................................69 Input power......................................................................................................................................................................69 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................................................70 13Electrostatic discharge ......................................................................................................................................................72 14Accessibility .......................................................................................................................................................................73 HP and accessibility .........................................................................................................................................................73 Finding the technology tools you need...................................................................................................................73 The HP commitment................................................................................................................................................73 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) .............................................................................74 Finding the best assistive technology.....................................................................................................................74 Assessing your needs ......................................................................................................................................74 Accessibility for HP products...........................................................................................................................74 Standards and legislation................................................................................................................................................75 Standards.................................................................................................................................................................75 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 .............................................................................................................................75 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG).................................................................................................75 Legislation and regulations.....................................................................................................................................75 Useful accessibility resources and links..........................................................................................................................76 Organizations ..........................................................................................................................................................76 Educational institutions ..........................................................................................................................................76 Other disability resources .......................................................................................................................................76 HP links ....................................................................................................................................................................77 Contacting support ..........................................................................................................................................................77 Index ........................................................................................................................................................................................78 ix 1 Getting started This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer and where to find additional HP resources. After you set up and register the computer, HP recommends the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

TIP: To quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop, press the Windows key on your keyboard. Pressing the Windows key again returns you to the previous screen. Connect to the internetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the internet. For more information, see Network connections on page 19. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 49. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Components on page 3 and Navigating the screen on page 24 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:

Select the Start button, and then select All apps. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Back up your hard driveCreate recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive to back up your hard drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 56. Access HP Support Assistant appFor quick online support, open the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). HP Support Assistant optimizes computer performance and resolves problems using the latest software updates, diagnostic tools, and guided assistance. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. Finding information To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Table 1-1 Additional information Resource Setup Instructions Contents Overview of computer setup and features Getting started 1 Contents Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) and proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer Table 1-1 Additional information (continued) Resource HP support For HP support, go to https://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. or Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP might provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1Getting started 2 Components Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where they are located, and how they work. Locating hardware Use these instructions to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type device manager in the search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software Use these instructions to find out what software is installed on your computer:

Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Right Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the right side of the computer. Components 3 Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions Component Description

(1) microSD card reader Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory card reader.

(2)

(3) USB Type-C power connector port, SuperSpeed 20 Gbps port, and DisplayPort output Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and (for select products) charges small devices (such as a smartphone) when the computer is on or in Sleep mode. NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-C charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device. and Connects a display device that has a USB Type-C connector, providing DisplayPort output. USB SuperSpeed 20 Gbps port with HP Sleep and Charge Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and charges small devices (such as a smartphone), even when the computer is off. NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-A charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device.

(4) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it might not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Left Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the left side of the computer. 4 Chapter 2Components Table 2-2 Left-side components and their descriptions Component Description

(1) Battery light When AC power is connected:

White: The battery charge is greater than 90%. Amber: The battery charge is from 0 to 90%. Off: The battery is not charging. When AC power is disconnected (battery not charging):

Blinking amber: The battery has reached a low battery level. When the battery has reached a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is not charging.

(2)

(3) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. USB Type-C power connectors and Thunderbolt ports with HP Sleep and Charge

(2) Connect a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and charges small devices (such as a smartphone), even when the computer is off.

(4) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-C charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device. NOTE: Your computer might also support a Thunderbolt docking station. and Connect a display device that has a USB Type-C connector, providing DisplayPort output. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Display Use the illustration and table to identify the display components. Display 5 Low blue light mode (select products only) Your computer display is shipped from the factory in low blue light mode for improved eye comfort and safety. Also, blue light mode automatically adjusts blue light emissions when you are using the computer at night or for reading. WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. The Safety & Comfort Guide is available on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. NOTE: Choose the illustration that matches your computer. Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions Component Description Infrared (IR) LEDs (2) On: Camera is operating.

(1)

(2) Camera (IR)*

Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product.

(3) Camera (Web)

(4) Webcam LED On: Camera is operating. 6 Chapter 2Components Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description

(5)

(6) Ambient light sensor Antennas (2)**

Detects light levels in the environment to adjust the camera's noise reduction levels. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).

*The infrared camera and lenses are not visible from the outside of the computer.

**The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Table 2-4 Display components and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2) Infrared LEDs (2) Camera (IR)*

Description On: Camera is operating. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. Low blue light mode (select products only) 7 Table 2-4 Display components and their descriptions (continued) Component

(3) Camera (Web) Description Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product.

(4)

(5)

(6) Web cam LED On: Camera is operating. Ambient light sensors (2) Antennas (2)**

Detect light levels in the environment to adjust the camera's noise reduction levels. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).

*The infrared camera and lenses are not visible from the outside of the computer.

**The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Keyboard area Keyboards can vary by language. NOTE: The keyboard, including the function keys and power key (select products only), is disabled in stand, tent, and tablet modes. To enable the keyboard, including the power key, change to the clamshell mode. Touchpad The touchpad settings and components are described here. Touchpad settings You learn how to adjust the touchpad settings and components here. Adjusting touchpad settings Use these steps to adjust touchpad settings and gestures. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type touchpad settings in the search box, and then press enter. 2. Choose a setting. Turning on the touchpad Follow these steps to turn on the touchpad. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type touchpad settings in the search box, and then press enter. 8 Chapter 2Components 2. Using an external mouse, click the Touchpad button. If you are not using an external mouse, press the Tab key repeatedly until the pointer rests on the touchpad button. Then press the spacebar to select the button. Touchpad components Use the illustration and table to identify the touchpad components. Table 2-5 Touchpad components and their descriptions Component Description Touchpad zone Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using touchpad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 24. Left touchpad zone Right touchpad zone Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse.

(1)

(2)

(3) Lights Use the illustration and table to identify the lights on the computer. Touchpad components 9 Table 2-6 Lights and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. Privacy key light (select products only) On: Privacy screen is on, which helps prevent side-angle viewing. Mute light Microphone mute light Camera privacy light Power light On: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Microphone is off. Off: Microphone is on. On: Camera is disabled. Off: Camera is enabled. On: The computer is on. Blinking (select products only): The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unnecessary components. Off: Depending on your computer model, the computer is off, in Hibernation, or in Sleep. Hibernation is the power-

saving state that uses the least amount of power.

(7) Fn lock light On: The fn key is locked. For more information, see Hot keys

(select products only) on page 15. 10 Chapter 2Components Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader Fingerprint readers can be located on the touchpad, on a side panel of the computer, or on the top cover below the keyboard. IMPORTANT: To verify that your computer supports fingerprint reader sign-in, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type Sign-in options in the search box, and then select the Sign-on options app. If Fingerprint recognition is not listed as an option, then your notebook does not include a fingerprint reader. Table 2-7 Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader and their descriptions Component

(1) Speakers Description Produce sound. Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader 11 Table 2-7 Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader and their descriptions (continued) Component

(2) Power key

(3) Fingerprint reader (select products only) Description When the computer is off, press the key briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the key briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the key briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the key briefly to exit Hibernation. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power key results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power key for at least 4 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, use the Power icon. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Swipe down across the fingerprint reader. See Windows Hello

(select products only) on page 48 for details. IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, make sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader. Special keys Use the illustration and table to identify the special keys. 12 Chapter 2Components Table 2-8 Special keys and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with another key. Such key combinations are called hot keys. See Hot keys (select products only) on page 15. Windows key Opens the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. Power button See Action keys on page 13. When the computer is off, press the button briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, use the Power icon. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings.

(6) Camera privacy switch Turns the camera off and on. NOTE: or more information, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28 Action keys Action keys perform specific functions and vary by computer. To determine which keys are on your computer, look at the icons on your keyboard and match them to the descriptions in this table. To use an action key, press and hold the key. NOTE: On some products, you must press the fn key in combination with the action key. Action keys 13 Table 2-9 Action keys and their descriptions Icon Description Switches the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing the key alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Helps prevent side-angle viewing from onlookers. If needed, decrease or increase brightness for well-lit or darker environments. Press the key again to turn off the privacy screen. NOTE: This feature is available only on select products. If the feature is not available on your computer, a message is displayed when you press this key. NOTE: To quickly turn on the highest privacy setting, press fn+p. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes the microphone. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. On select products, you can adjust the brightness of the keyboard backlight. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer), to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the touchpad (select products only). To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Press to switch between overtype mode and insert mode. Overtype mode: The cursor overwrites any existing text. Insert mode: The cursor inserts characters at its current position. 14 Chapter 2Components Table 2-9 Action keys and their descriptions (continued) Icon Description Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Executes frequently used tasks. Some tasks might not be available on all products. Opens an application, file, or website Enters frequently used text into a permanent clipboard Ability to change system profiles Ability to change system properties Executes user-defined key sequences NOTE: The action key feature is enabled at the factory. On select products only, you can disable this feature by pressing and holding the fn key and the left shift key. The fn lock light will turn on. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Hot keys (select products only) A hot key is the combination of the fn key and another key. Use the table to identify the hot keys. To use a hot key:

Press the fn key, and then press one of the keys listed in the following table. Table 2-10 Hot keys and their descriptions Key Description C E R S W Turns on scroll lock. Turns on the insert function. Breaks the operation. Sends a programing query. Pauses the operation. Bottom Use the illustration and table to identify the bottom components. Hot keys (select products only) 15 Table 2-11 Bottom components and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2) Speakers (2) Vent Description Produce sound. Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you might need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels might be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you might be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. 16 Chapter 2Components Table 2-12 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Serial number Product ID HP product name Table 2-13 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) HP product name Product ID Serial number Warranty period Table 2-14 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) HP product name Warranty period Product ID Labels 17 Table 2-14 Service label components (continued) Component

(4) Serial number Regulatory labelsProvide regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification labelsProvide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 18 Chapter 2Components 3 Network connections Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites by using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter helps you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer might be equipped with one or more wireless devices. WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select products only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations

(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 m (approximately 33 ft) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features. Wireless button (also called airplane mode key or wireless key) Operating system controls Wireless button The computer might have a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. Depending on your computer model, you have several methods to access operating system controls:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, and then select Control Panel. or On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Network and Internet settings. Network connections 19 Connecting to a WLAN Before you can connect to a WLAN with this procedure, you must first set up internet access. NOTE: When you are setting up internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an internet service provider (ISP). To purchase internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the internet service. 1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select the right arrow icon next to the Wi-Fi button to see the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you might be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE: Depending on your computer model, if you do not see the WLAN that you want to connect to, follow one of these methods:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Network and Internet settings. Select WiFi, and then select Manage known networks. Select the Add network button. A list of options is displayed, which allows you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI number, MEID number, or both to activate mobile broadband service. The number might be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. 1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon. Select Network and Internet settings. In the Network and Internet window, select Cellular, and then select Mobile operator settings. 20 Chapter 3Network connections Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it might be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information that is included with your computer or the mobile network operator might provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices. Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse External keyboard Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type bluetooth in the search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select Add device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device that you are adding, NOTE:

follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, see the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some NOTE:

devices might have additional requirements; see the documentation provided with the device. Connecting to a wired network Select products might allow a local area network (LAN) connection, which uses a network cable. The cable is sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) 21 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly) or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

NOTE: A feature called HP LAN-Wireless Protection might be enabled on your computer. It closes your wireless (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection when you connect directly to a LAN. For more information about HP LAN-Wireless Protection, see Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) on page 22. If there is no RJ-45 port on the computer, connecting to a LAN requires a network cable and a network jack or an optional docking device or expansion product. 1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer or on an optional docking device or expansion product. 2. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) In a LAN environment, you can set HP LAN-Wireless Protection to safeguard your LAN network from unauthorized wireless access. When HP LAN-Wireless Protection is enabled, the WLAN (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection is turned off when the computer is connected directly to a LAN. To turn on and customize HP LAN-Wireless Protection:

1. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and before the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

22 Chapter 3Network connections 2. 3. 4. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Built-in Device Options. Select the check box for LAN/WLAN Auto Switching, LAN/WWAN Auto Switching, or both to turn off WLAN connections, WWAN connections, or both when connected to a LAN network. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using HP MAC Address Pass Through (select products only) MAC Address Pass Through provides a customizable way of identifying your computer and its communications on networks. This system MAC address provides unique identification even when your computer is connected through a network adapter. This address is enabled by default. To customize MAC Address Pass Through:

1. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Advanced, and then select MAC Address Pass Through. In the box to the right of Host Based MAC Address, select either System Address to enable MAC address Pass Through or Custom Address to customize the address. If you selected Custom, select MAC ADDRESS, enter your customized system MAC address, and then press enter to save the address. If the computer has an embedded LAN and you would like to use the embedded MAC address as the system MAC address, select Reuse Embedded LAN Address. or Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using HP MAC Address Pass Through (select products only) 23 4 Navigating the screen Depending on your computer model, you can navigate the computer screen using one or more methods. Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen. Use touch gestures on the touchpad. Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately). Use an on-screen keyboard. Use a pointing stick. Using touchpad and touch screen gestures The touchpad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right touchpad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Some products include a precision touchpad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if you have a precision touchpad and find additional information, follow these steps, depending on your computer:

Select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the touchpad and a touch screen. Tap Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the touchpad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. 24 Chapter 4Navigating the screen Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) Place two fingers slightly apart on the touchpad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) Tap two fingers on the touchpad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse. Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger tap opens the search box. Tap three fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) 25 To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop. Swipe three fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe three fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe three fingers left or right to switch between open windows. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops. Swipe four fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe four fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe four fingers left or right to switch between desktops. 26 Chapter 4Navigating the screen To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. One-finger slide (touch screen) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) These instructions help you learn to use the on-screen keyboard. You can display the on-screen keyboard in several ways:

1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type on-screen keyboard in the search box, and then select On-Screen Keyboard. or 2. Press the Windows key +ctrl+o. NOTE: Suggested words might be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. One-finger slide (touch screen) 27 5 Entertainment features Use your HP computer for business or pleasure to meet with others via the camera, mix audio and video, or connect external devices like a projector, monitor, TV, or speakers. See Components on page 3 to locate the audio, video and camera features on your computer. Using a camera (select products only) Your computer has one or more cameras that enable you to connect with others for work or play. Most cameras allow you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Cameras can be front facing or rear facing. To determine which camera or cameras are on your product, see Components on page 3. To use your camera, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type camera in the search box, and then select Camera. Some cameras also feature HD (high-definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Security on page 40 for details about using Windows Hello. You can enhance your computer privacy by covering the lens with the camera privacy cover. By default, the camera lens is uncovered, but you can slide the camera privacy cover to block the camera's view. To use the camera, slide the camera privacy cover in the opposite direction to reveal the lens. Using audio You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select products) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach headphones or speakers. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones You can connect wired headphones to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

28 Chapter 5Entertainment features Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting headsets You can connect a headset to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. A stand-alone microphone can be plugged into a USB port. See your manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. Viewing or changing sound settings Use these instructions to view or change sound settings. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, and then select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using the control panel to view and control audio settings You can view or change sound settings using the audio control panel. Your computer might include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, DTS, Beats audio, or another provider. As a result, your computer might include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, select Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. Connecting headsets 29 To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your video features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) Connect a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable. NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C DisplayPort device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external DisplayPort device, connect the DisplayPort device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort connector on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external DisplayPort device. Press f4 to cycle through four display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, increase the screen resolution of the NOTE:

external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. 30 Chapter 5Entertainment features Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport MultiStream Transport (MST) allows you to connect multiple wired display devices to your computer by connecting to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on your computer and also to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on a hub or an external docking station. You can connect in several ways, depending on the type of graphics controller installed on your computer and whether your computer includes a built-in hub. Go to Device Manager to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Connecting displays to computers with AMD or NVIDIA graphics (with an optional hub) To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps. NOTE: With an AMD graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to six external display devices. NOTE: With an NVIDIA graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to four external display devices. 1. 2. 3. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort (DP) connector on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. Connect your external display devices to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on the hub. To see all of your connected display devices, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type device manager in the search box, and then select the Device Manager app. If you don't see all of your connected displays, be sure that each is connected to the correct port on the hub. NOTE: Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which spans your computer screen across all enabled display devices. Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps. NOTE: With an Intel graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to three display devices. 1. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort connector on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. 2. Connect your external display devices to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on the hub. 3. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DisplayPort hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Select the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the NOTE:

correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps. Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport 31 With your internal hub and Intel graphics controller, you can connect up to three display devices in the following configurations:

Two 1920 1200 DisplayPort monitors connected to the computer and one 1920 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station One 2560 1600 DisplayPort monitor connected to the computer and one 1920 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station 1. Connect your external display devices to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on the computer base or the docking station. 2. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DisplayPort hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Select the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. NOTE:

If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) To connect devices to a USB Type-C port, follow these steps. NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 32 Chapter 5Entertainment features 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) 33 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state automatically initiates after a period of inactivity. Your work is available in memory, allowing you to resume your work quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. Depending on your computer model, the Sleep state might also support Modern Standby mode. This mode keeps some internal operations awake and enables your computer to receive web notifications, such as emails, while in Sleep. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 34. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 35. IMPORTANT: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in several ways. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1 or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button (select products only). You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). Tap the touchpad (select products only). 34 Chapter 6Managing power When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. IMPORTANT:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type power in the search box, and then select Choose a power plan. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording might vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. 4. Select Save changes. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. IMPORTANT:

Windows password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Shutting down (turning off) the computer The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. IMPORTANT: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly NOTE:

pressing the power button. 1. Save your work and close all open programs. Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) 35 2. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Using the Power icon The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To view power settings, right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings. Different power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When the computer has a charged battery and is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time might vary by 10%. When the remaining battery charge is between 0 and 50%, the battery charges to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. 36 Chapter 6Managing power Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) Follow these steps to access battery information. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. Select Fixes & Diagnostics, select Check your battery, and then select Launch. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

HP Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power Follow these steps to conserve battery power and maximize battery life. Lower the brightness of the display. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the computer warns you in one of several ways. The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon on page 36. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level You can quickly resolve low battery level conditions. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) 37 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power. AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the battery level is low and you cannot bring the computer out of Hibernation, connect the AC adapter. 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). 1. Select the Search icon on the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) on the taskbar. 2. Select Fixes & Diagnostics, select Check your battery, and then select Launch. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Running on external power For information about connecting to external power, see the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or updating system software When updating the system BIOS 38 Chapter 6Managing power When writing information to a disc (select products only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge. The Power icon changes appearance. When you disconnect external power:

The computer switches to battery power. The Power icon changes appearance. Running on external power 39 7 Security Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, Computer Setup

(BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and Computer Setup (BIOS, which runs under any operating system) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Some features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://www.hp.com. Table 7-1 Security solutions Computer risk Security feature Unauthorized use of the computer HP Client Security software, in combination with a password, smart card, contactless card, registered fingerprints, or other authentication credential BIOS power-on password Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (BIOS) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock password (select products only) in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized startup from an optional external optical drive

(select products only), optional external hard drive (select products only), or internal network adapter Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data Windows BitLocker Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable on select products only)

*Computer Setup is an embedded, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. You can use a pointing device (touchpad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use the touch screen. 40 Chapter 7Security Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. You can set several types of passwords, depending on how you want to control access to your information. You can set passwords in Windows or in Computer Setup, which is preinstalled on the computer. BIOS administrator, power-on, and DriveLock passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. If you forget both the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password set in Computer Setup, the hard drive that is protected by the passwords is permanently locked and can no longer be used. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. Use the Password Manager feature of HP Client Security to store your user names and passwords for your websites and applications. You can securely read them in the future if they cannot be remembered. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Setting passwords in Windows Windows passwords can help protect your computer from unauthorized access. Table 7-2 Types of Windows passwords and their functions Password Function Administrator password*

Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. User password*

Protects access to a Windows user account.

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: Setting the Windows administrator password does not set the BIOS administrator password. Setting passwords in Computer Setup Computer Setup passwords provide additional layers of security for your computer. Using passwords 41 Table 7-3 Types of Computer Setup passwords and their functions Password Function BIOS administrator password*

Protects access to Computer Setup. Power-on password DriveLock master password*

DriveLock user password*

If features have been enabled to prevent removing the NOTE:

BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled. Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. This password is also used to remove DriveLock protection. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process.

*For details about each of these passwords, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps. Setting a new BIOS administrator password A BIOS administrator password helps prevent unauthorized access to Computer Setup. Use these instructions to set a new BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. Select Security, select Create BIOS administrator password or Set Up BIOS administrator Password

(select products only), and then press enter. 3. When prompted, type a password. 4. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 5. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. 42 Chapter 7Security Changing a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to change a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password. 6. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to delete a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. Changing a BIOS administrator password 43 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same keys that you used to set the password), and then press enter. After two unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Using DriveLock Security Options DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drives of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, the appropriate password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer or an advanced port replicator for it to be unlocked. DriveLock Security Options offers the following features:

Automatic DriveLockSee Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) on page 44. Set DriveLock Master PasswordSee Selecting manual DriveLock on page 45. Enable DriveLockSee Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 46. Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) You must set a BIOS administrator password before you can enable Automatic DriveLock. When Automatic DriveLock is enabled, a random DriveLock user password and a DriveLock master password derived from the BIOS administrator password are created. When the computer is turned on, the random user password automatically unlocks the drive. If the drive is moved to another computer, you must enter the BIOS administrator password for the original computer at the DriveLock password prompt to unlock the drive. Enabling Automatic DriveLock To enable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. 44 Chapter 7Security 3. 4. 5. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to select the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Disabling Automatic DriveLock To disable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to clear the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering an Automatic DriveLock password While Automatic DriveLock is enabled and the drive remains attached to the original computer, you will not be prompted to enter a DriveLock password to unlock the drive. However, if the drive is moved to another computer, or the system board is replaced on the original computer, you will be prompted to provide the DriveLock password. If this happens, at the DriveLock Password prompt, type the BIOS administrator password for the original computer (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter to unlock the drive. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Selecting manual DriveLock To manually apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, you must set a master password, and DriveLock must be enabled in Computer Setup. Disabling Automatic DriveLock 45 IMPORTANT: To prevent a DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, you can access the hard drive only by entering either the DriveLock user password or the master password. The owner of the DriveLock user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the DriveLock master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password can be identical. Setting a DriveLock master password To set a DriveLock master password, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, make the selection for Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Set DriveLock Master Password, and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock master password. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. NOTE: You can enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password before exiting from Computer Setup. For more information, see Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 46. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password To enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password, follow these steps. 46 Chapter 7Security 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Enable DriveLock and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock user password and enable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Disabling DriveLock To disable DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. Select Disable DriveLock, and then press enter. Follow the on-screen instructions to disable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disabling DriveLock 47 Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your DriveLock user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Changing a DriveLock password To change a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn off the computer. Press the power button. At the DriveLock Password prompt, type the current DriveLock user password or master password that you are changing, press enter, and then press or tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. 6. Make the selection for the DriveLock password that you want to change, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enter passwords. NOTE: The Change DriveLock Master Password option is visible only if the DriveLock master password was provided at the DriveLock Password prompt in step 3. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, Windows Hello allows you to enroll your fingerprint and your facial ID, and set up a PIN. After enrollment, you can use your fingerprint reader, facial ID, or PIN to sign in to Windows. To set up Windows Hello:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. If you do not have a password set up, you must add one before you can use other sign-in options. Select Password, and then select Add. Under Facial recognition (Windows Hello) or Fingerprint recognition (Windows Hello), select Set up. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, be sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader. 48 Chapter 7Security NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access email, a network, or the internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage that they cause. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Windows Defender is preinstalled on your computer. HP strongly recommends that you continue to use an antivirus program to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, access the HP Support Assistant. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program that you install on your computer, network, or both, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized email attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. To view or change the settings:

IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. Using antivirus software 49 1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Windows Update. Follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Client Security (select products only) HP Client Security software is preinstalled on your computer. You can access this software through the HP Client Security icon at the far right of the taskbar or Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that help protect against unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. Using HP TechPulse (select products only) HP TechPulse is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP TechPulse helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost-effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hpdaas.com/. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select products. To use the fingerprint reader, you must enroll your fingerprints in HP Client Security's Credential Manager. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. After you enroll your fingerprints in Credential Manager, you can use HP Client Security's Password Manager to store and fill in your user names and passwords in supported websites and applications. The fingerprint reader is a small metallic sensor that is located in one of the following areas of your computer:

Near the bottom of the touchpad On the right side of the keyboard On the upper-right side of the display On the left side of the display On the back of the display Depending on your product, the reader may be oriented horizontally or vertically. 50 Chapter 7Security 8 Maintenance Performing regular maintenance keeps your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. Connect the computer to AC power. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type defragment in the search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type disk in the search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under some conditions. You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. Maintenance 51 NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay, the secondary hard drive bay (select products only), or both are parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers regularly. Updates can resolve issues and provide new features and options. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you do not get the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. To update your programs and drivers, follow these steps. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. 3. Under My notebook, select Updates. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Cleaning your computer regularly removes dirt and debris so that your device continues to operate at its best. Use the following information to safely clean the external surfaces of your computer. Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only) HP Easy Clean helps you to avoid accidental input while you clean the computer surfaces. This software disables devices such as the keyboard, touch screen, and touchpad for a preset amount of time so that you can clean all computer surfaces. 1. Start HP Easy Clean in one of the following ways:

Select the Start button, and then select HP Easy Clean. or Select the HP Easy Clean icon in the taskbar. or Select the Start button, and then select the HP Easy Clean tile. 2. Now that your device is disabled for a short period, see Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 53 for the recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer. After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning your 52 Chapter 8Maintenance computer with a disinfectant on page 53 for guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Removing dirt and debris from your computer Here are the recommended steps to clean dirt and debris from your computer. For computers with wood veneer, see Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 54. 1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. 2. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 53 for recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant The World Health Organization (WHO) recommends cleaning surfaces, followed by disinfection, as a best practice for preventing the spread of viral respiratory illnesses and harmful bacteria. After cleaning the external surfaces of your computer using the steps in Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 53, Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 54, or both, you might also choose to clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. A disinfectant that is within HPs cleaning guidelines is an alcohol solution consisting of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. This solution is also known as rubbing alcohol and is sold in most stores. Follow these steps when disinfecting high-touch, external surfaces on your computer:

1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. Removing dirt and debris from your computer 53 2. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with a mixture of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. CAUTION: Do not use any of the following chemicals or any solutions that contain them, including spray-based surface cleaners: bleach, peroxides (including hydrogen peroxide), acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, methylene chloride, or any petroleum-based materials, such as gasoline, paint thinner, benzene, or toluene. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. Caring for wood veneer (select products only) Your product might feature high-quality wood veneer. As with all natural wood products, proper care is important for best results over the life of the product. Because of the nature of natural wood, you might see unique variations in the grain pattern or subtle variations in color, which are normal. Clean the wood with a dry, static-free microfiber cloth or chamois. Avoid cleaning products containing substances such as ammonia, methylene chloride, acetone, turpentine, or other petroleum-based solvents. Do not expose the wood to sun or moisture for long periods of time. If the wood becomes wet, dry it by dabbing with an absorbent, lint-free cloth. Avoid contact with any substance that might dye or discolor the wood. Avoid contact with sharp objects or rough surfaces that might scratch the wood. See Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 53 for the recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer. After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 53 for sanitizing guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you must travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. 54 Chapter 8Maintenance Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. IMPORTANT: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you can use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices might be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions might apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to run the computer with a voltage converter kit that is sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 55 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering You can use Windows tools or HP software to back up your information, create a restore point, reset your computer, create recovery media, or restore your computer to its factory state. Performing these standard procedures can return your computer to a working state faster. IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before Backing up information and creating recovery media These methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select products only. Using Windows tools for backing up HP recommends that you back up your information immediately after initial setup. You can do this task either using Windows Backup locally with an external USB drive or using online tools. IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive. For details:

Go to http://www.hp.com, search for HP Cloud Recovery, and then select the result that matches the type of computer that you have. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 57 to restore your computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your machine to a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling all the operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process. Restoring and recovering your system You have several tools available to recover your system both within and outside of Windows if the desktop cannot load. 56 Chapter 9Backing up, restoring, and recovering HP recommends that you attempt to restore your system using the Restoring and recovery methods on page 57. Creating a system restore System Restore is available in Windows. The System Restore software can automatically or manually create restore points, or snapshots, of the system files and settings on the computer at a particular point. When you use System Restore, it returns your computer to its state at the time you made the restore point. Your personal files and documents should not be affected. Restoring and recovery methods After you run the first method, test to see whether the issue still exists before you proceed to the next method, which might now be unnecessary. 1. 2. Run a Microsoft System Restore. Run Reset this PC. NOTE: The options Remove everything and then Fully clean the drive can take several hours to complete and leave no information on your computer. It is the safest way to reset your computer before you recycle it. 3. Recover using HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery media on page 57. For more information about the first two methods, see the Get Help app:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select the Get Help app, and then enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the internet to access the Get Help app. Recovering using HP Recovery media You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. On select products, it can be created on a bootable USB flash drive using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool. For details, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 56. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To recover your system:

Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. NOTE: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 57 to restore your computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your machine to a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling all the operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process. Creating a system restore 57 Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart using the HP Recovery media, you can change the computer boot order, the order of devices listed in BIOS for startup information. You can select an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before To change the boot order:

1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. For computers or tablets with keyboards attached, turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards, turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume up button, and then select f9. or Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Sure Recover (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Recover, a PC operating system (OS) recovery solution built into the hardware and software. HP Sure Recover can fully restore the HP OS image without installed recovery software. Using HP Sure Recover, an administrator or user can restore the system and install:

Latest version of the operating system Platform-specific device drivers Software applications, in the case of a custom image To access the latest documentation for HP Sure Recover, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Follow the on-screen instructions to find your product and locate your documentation. 58 Chapter 9Backing up, restoring, and recovering 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start HP provides several tools to help set up and protect your computer. Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as hard drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. To start Computer Setup, turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup You can navigate and select in Computer Setup using one or more methods. To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps. NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start 59 1. 2. Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 59. Select Main, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. NOTE: On select products, the selections might display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS might be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. If you are already in Windows, you can access BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) by pressing fn+esc (select products only). Or you can use Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 59. Select Main, and then select System Information. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To check for later BIOS versions, see Preparing for a BIOS update on page 60. Preparing for a BIOS update Be sure to follow all prerequisites before downloading and installing a BIOS update. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 60 Chapter 10Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start Downloading a BIOS update After you review the prerequisites, you can check for and download BIOS updates. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

2. 3. 4. a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You might need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. Installing a BIOS update BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type file in the search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps. 1. Access the Boot Device Options menu:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. 2. Select a boot device, press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading a BIOS update 61 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup

(BIOS). IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation or usage of TPM that violates the previously mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will not be responsible for any related liabilities. NOTE:

If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system. To access TPM settings in Computer Setup:

1. 2. Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 59. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Sure Start (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that monitors the computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. Advanced users can customize the default configuration. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 62 Chapter 10Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics You can use the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics utility to determine whether your computer hardware is running properly. The three versions are HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI

(Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), and (for select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, a firmware feature. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 64. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit failure ID code is generated for select component tests. For interactive tests, such as keyboard, mouse, or audio and video palette, you must perform troubleshooting steps before you can receive a failure ID. You have several options after you receive a failure ID:

Select Next to open the Event Automation Service (EAS) page, where you can log the case. or Scan the QR code with your mobile device, which takes you to the EAS page, where you can log the case. or Select the box next to the 24-digit failure ID to copy your failure code and send it to support. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, you can access it from HP Support Assistant or the Start menu. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support (select products only) After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 3. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 63 NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Support Assistant. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. 3. Select Fixes & Diagnostics. Select Run Hardware diagnostics, and then select Launch. 4. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only) After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from the Start menu. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select All apps. Select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 3. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows downloading instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP, follow these steps. 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics Windows, and then select the specific Windows diagnostics version to download to your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool downloads to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. 64 Chapter 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the Diagnostics section, select Download, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select the specific Windows diagnostics version to be downloaded to your computer or USB flash drive. The tool downloads to the selected location. Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store You can download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store. 1. Select the Microsoft Store app on your desktop. or Select the Search icon in the taskbar, and then type Microsoft Store in the search box. Enter HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows in the Microsoft Store search box. Follow the on-screen directions. 2. 3. The tool downloads to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. For some products, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create NOTE:

the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 66. If your PC does not start in Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit failure ID code is generated. For assistance in solving the problem:

Select Contact HP, accept the HP privacy disclaimer, and then use a mobile device to scan the failure ID code that appears on the next screen. The HP Customer Support - Service Center page appears with your failure ID and product number automatically filled in. Follow the on-screen instructions. or Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store 65 Contact support, and provide the failure ID code. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow this procedure. 1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 66. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in some situations. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstallation image. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive, follow this procedure. 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. 66 Chapter 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it might upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information about Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a SoftPaq that you can download to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version You can download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive. 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number You can download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software by using the product name or NOTE:

number. 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform several customizations. Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a hard drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) 67 Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password that you use for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. 68 Chapter 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 12 Specifications When you travel with or store your computer, the input power ratings and operating specifications provide helpful information. Input power The power information in this section might be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100 V240 V, 50 Hz60 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within one or more of the following specifications. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Specifications 69 Table 12-1 DC power specifications Input Power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /

15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Operating environment Use the operating specifications for helpful information when you travel with or store your computer. Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C Nonoperating 20C to 60C Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) 41F to 95F 4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

70 Chapter 12Specifications Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications (continued) Factor Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 15 m to 3,048 m 15 m to 12,192 m 50 ft to 10,000 ft 50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 71 13 Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 72 Chapter 13Electrostatic discharge 14 Accessibility HP's goal is to design, produce, and market products, services, and information that everyone everywhere can use, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate third-party assistive technology (AT) devices or applications. HP and accessibility Because HP works to weave diversity, inclusion, and work/life into the fabric of the company, it is reflected in everything HP does. HP strives to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 74. The HP commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports the company's diversity objectives and helps ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. The HP accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve that goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide HP actions. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within HP, and provide employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features, and make information about HP products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that improves assistive technology relevant to HP products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. Accessibility 73 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. As a founding member, HP joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports HPs accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that people with disabilities can effectively use. IAAP will make the profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You can choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, can also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products These links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable and available in your country or region, that are included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and products most appropriate for your situation. HP Aging & Accessibility: Go to http://www.hp.com, type Accessibility in the search box. Select Office of Aging and Accessibility. HP computers: For Windows products, go to http://www.hp.com/support, type Windows Accessibility Options in the Search our knowledge search box. Select the appropriate operating system in the results. HP Shopping, peripherals for HP products: Go to http://store.hp.com, select Shop, and then select Monitors or Accessories. If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 77. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

74 Chapter 14Accessibility Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows and Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) Standards and legislation Countries worldwide are enacting regulations to improve access to products and services for persons with disabilities. These regulations are historically applicable to telecommunications products and services, PCs and printers with certain communications and video playback features, their associated user documentation, and their customer support. Standards The US Access Board created Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-

based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multimedia, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The European Union created the EN 301 549 standard within Mandate 376 as an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. These links provide information about key legislation, regulations, and standards. Standards and legislation 75 United States Canada Europe Australia Useful accessibility resources and links These organizations, institutions, and resources might be good sources of information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you encounter on the internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations These organizations are a few of the many that provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions Many educational institutions, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-

related limitations. California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources Many resources, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program 76 Chapter 14Accessibility ILO Global Business and Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable HP links These HP-specific links provide information that relates to disabilities and age-related limitations. HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales Contacting support HP offers technical support and assistance with accessibility options for customers with disabilities. NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. HP links 77 Index A accessibility 73-75, 77 accessibility needs assessment 74 action keys 13 identifying 13 keyboard backlight 14 mute 14 privacy screen 14 screen brightness 14 speaker volume 14 switch screen image 14 using 13 wireless 15 administrator password 41 airplane mode key 19 ambient light sensor 7, 8 identifying 7, 8 antivirus software 49 assistive technology (AT) finding 74 purpose 73 AT (assistive technology) finding 74 purpose 73 audio 28 adjusting volume 14 headphones 28 headsets 29 sound settings 29 speakers 28 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack, identifying 5 Automatic Drivelock selecting 44 Automatic DriveLock disabling 45 enabling 44 Automatic DriveLock password entering 45 B backup, creating 56 backups 56 battery conserving power 37 discharging 37 78 Index factory-sealed 38 finding information 37 low battery levels 37 resolving low battery level 37, 38 battery charge 36 battery information, finding 37 battery light 5 battery power 36 BIOS determining version 60 downloading an update 60, 61 updating 60 Bluetooth device 19, 21 Bluetooth label 16 boot order changing using the f9 prompt 61 boot order, changing 58 buttons camera 13 left Touchpad 9 power 12, 13 right Touchpad 9 C camera 6-8 identifying 6-8 using 28 camera disable button, identifying 13 camera privacy cover using 28 camera privacy light, identifying 10 caps lock light, identifying 10 caring for your computer 52 cleaning your computer 52 caring for wood veneer 54 disinfecting 53 HP Easy Clean 52 removing dirt and debris 53 components bottom 15 display 5, 6 keyboard area 8 left side 4 right side 3 Computer Setup BIOS administrator password 42-44 navigating and selecting 59 restoring factory settings 59 starting 59 connecting to a WLAN 20 connector, power 5 corporate WLAN connection 20 critical battery level 37 customer support, accessibility 77 D data transfer 32 Disk Cleanup software 51 Disk Defragmenter software 51 display components 5, 6 DriveLock description 45 disabling 47 enabling 46 DriveLock master password changing 48 DriveLock password changing 48 entering 48 setting 46 DriveLock Security Options 44 E electrostatic discharge 72 esc key, identifying 13 external power, using 38 F factory-sealed battery 38 fingerprint reader 50 fingerprint reader, identifying 12 fingerprints, registering 48 firewall software 49 fn key, identifying 13 fn lock light, identifying 10 four-finger swipe touchpad gesture 26 four-finger tap touchpad gesture 26 G gesture 26 H hardware, locating 3 headphones, connecting 28 headsets, connecting 29 Hibernation exiting 35 initiated during critical battery level 37 initiating 35 hot keys break 15 insert 15 microphone mute 14 pause 15 programming query 15 scroll lock 15 using 15 HP 3D DriveGuard 51 HP Assistive Policy 73 HP Client Security 50 HP Fast Charge 36 HP LAN-Wireless Protection 22 HP MAC Address Pass Through 23 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading 66 failure ID code 65 starting 66 using 65 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows accessing 63, 64 downloading 64, 65 failure ID code 63 installing 65 using 63 HP Recovery media recovery 57 HP resources 1 HP Sure Recover 58 HP TechPulse 50 I infrared LEDs, identifying 6, 7 initiating Sleep and Hibernation 34 input power 69 International Association of Accessibility Professionals 74 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo 5 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 27 operating environment 70 K P keyboard and optional mouse passwords using 27 keyboard backlight action key 14 keys action 13 esc 13 fn 13 Windows 13 L labels Bluetooth 16 regulatory 16 serial number 16 service 16 wireless certification 16 WLAN 16 left side components 4 lights AC adapter and battery 5 battery 5 camera privacy 10 caps lock 10 fn lock 10 microphone mute 10 power 10 privacy key 10 lights, mute 10 low battery level 37 low blue light mode 6 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 51 Disk Defragmenter 51 updating programs and drivers 52 managing power 34 memory card reader, identifying 4 microphone mute key, identifying 14 microphone mute light, identifying 10 mute light, identifying 10 mute volume action key 14 administrator 41 BIOS administrator 42-44 user 41 ports USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge 4 USB Type-C 32 USB Type-C DisplayPort 4 USB Type-C power connector 4 USB Type-C power connector and Thunderbolt port with HP Sleep and Charge 5 USB Type-C SuperSpeed 4 USB Type-C SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort 30 power battery 36 external 38 power button, identifying 13 power connector identifying 4, 5 identifying USB Type-C 5 power icon, using 36 power key, identifying 12 power lights 10 power settings, using 36 precision touchpad using 24 precision touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 26 four-finger tap 26 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 25 two-finger tap 25 privacy key light 10 privacy screen action key, identifying 14 product name and number, computer 16 public WLAN connection 20 R recovery 56 discs 57 media 57 Index 79 USB flash drive 57 recovery media 56 standards and legislation, accessibility 75 creating using HP Cloud Recovery SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort Download Tool 56 creating using Windows tools 56 regulatory information connector, connecting USB Type-

C 30 Sure Start using 62 regulatory label 16 wireless certification labels 16 Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics switch screen image action key 14 system restore 57 system restore point, creating 56 UEFI settings customizing 67 using 67 resources, accessibility 76 restoring 56 restoring and recovery methods 57 right side components 3 S screen brightness action keys 14 Section 508 accessibility standards 75 security cable 50 security cable slot, identifying 4 serial number, computer 16 service labels, locating 16 setup utility navigating and selecting 59 restoring factory settings 59 shipping the computer 54 shutdown 35 Sleep exiting 34 initiating 34 Sleep and Hibernation, initiating 34 slots security cable 4 software antivirus 49 Disk Cleanup 51 Disk Defragmenter 51 firewall 49 software installed, locating 3 software updates, installing 49 sound See audio sound settings, using 29 speaker volume action keys 14 speakers connecting 28 speakers, identifying 11 special keys, using 12 80 Index T tap touchpad and touch screen gesture 24 three-finger swipe touchpad gesture 26 three-finger tap touchpad gesture 25 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 27 touchpad settings 8 using 24 touchpad and touch screen gestures tap 24 two-finger pinch zoom 24 Touchpad buttons identifying 9 touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 26 four-finger tap 26 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 25 two-finger tap 25 Touchpad zone, identifying 9 TPM settings 62 transfer data 32 traveling with the computer 16, 54 turning off the computer 35 two-finger pinch zoom touchpad and touch screen gesture 24 two-finger slide touchpad gesture 25 two-finger tap touchpad gesture 25 U unresponsive system 35 updating programs and drivers 52 USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 4 USB Type-C port, connecting 30, 32 USB Type-C power connector and Thunderbolt port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 5 USB Type-C power connector port, identifying 4 USB Type-C SuperSpeed port, identifying 4 user password 41 using passwords 41 using the keyboard and optional mouse 27 using the touchpad 24 V vents, identifying 16 video 29 DisplayPort device 30 USB Type-C 30 volume adjusting 14 mute 14 W web cam LEDs, identifying 6, 8 Windows backup 56 recovery media 56 system restore point 56 Windows Hello using 48 Windows key, identifying 13 Windows tools, using 56 wireless action key 15 wireless button 19 wireless certification label 16 wireless controls button 19 operating system 19 wireless key 19 wireless light 19 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 20 corporate WLAN connection 20 functional range 20 public WLAN connection 20 WLAN device 16 WLAN label 16 WWAN device 19, 20

User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides information about components, network connection, power management, security, backing up, and more. Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Legal information Copyright 2022 HP Development Company, L.P. Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features might not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows is automatically updated, which is always enabled. High-speed internet and Microsoft account required. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. See http://www.windows.com. If your product ships with Windows in S Mode: Windows in S Mode works exclusively with apps from the Microsoft Store within Windows. Certain default settings, features, and apps cannot be changed. Some accessories and apps that are compatible with Windows may not work (including some antivirus, PDF writers, driver utilities, and accessibility apps), and performance may vary, even if you switch out of S Mode. If you switch to Windows, you cannot switch back to S Mode. Learn more at Windows.com/SmodeFAQ. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, Pentium, and Thunderbolt are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. NVIDIA and the NVIDIA logo are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. The microSD logo and microSD are trademarks of SD-3C LLC. USB Type-C and USB-C are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum. DisplayPort and the DisplayPort logo are trademarks owned by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) in the United States and other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Sound is a trademark of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved

. Second Edition: May 2022 First Edition: January 2022 Document Part Number: N05887-002 Safety warning notice Reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer by following the practices described. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. iii Processor configuration setting (select products only) Important information about processor configurations. IMPORTANT: Select computer products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. iv Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1Getting started.......................................................................................................................................................................1 Finding information ...........................................................................................................................................................1 2Components ...........................................................................................................................................................................3 Locating hardware .............................................................................................................................................................3 Locating software..............................................................................................................................................................3 Right...................................................................................................................................................................................3 Left.....................................................................................................................................................................................4 Display ...............................................................................................................................................................................5 Low blue light mode (select products only) ..............................................................................................................6 Keyboard area....................................................................................................................................................................8 Touchpad ...................................................................................................................................................................8 Touchpad settings .............................................................................................................................................8 Adjusting touchpad settings .....................................................................................................................8 Turning on the touchpad ...........................................................................................................................8 Touchpad components ......................................................................................................................................9 Lights .........................................................................................................................................................................9 Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader ..........................................................................................................11 Special keys .............................................................................................................................................................12 Action keys...............................................................................................................................................................13 Hot keys (select products only) ...............................................................................................................................15 Bottom .............................................................................................................................................................................15 Labels...............................................................................................................................................................................16 3Network connections ...........................................................................................................................................................19 Connecting to a wireless network ...................................................................................................................................19 Using the wireless controls .....................................................................................................................................19 Wireless button ...............................................................................................................................................19 Operating system controls..............................................................................................................................19 Connecting to a WLAN .............................................................................................................................................20 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) ................................................................................................20 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only)........................................................................................21 Connecting Bluetooth devices.........................................................................................................................21 Connecting to a wired network........................................................................................................................................21 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only)...........................................................................22 Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) ......................................................................................22 Using HP MAC Address Pass Through (select products only) .........................................................................................23 4Navigating the screen ..........................................................................................................................................................24 Using touchpad and touch screen gestures ....................................................................................................................24 Tap ...........................................................................................................................................................................24 v Two-finger pinch zoom............................................................................................................................................24 Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) .............................................................................................25 Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ...............................................................................................25 Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad).............................................................................................25 Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ...............................................................................................26 Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad).........................................................................................26 Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) ..................................................................................................................26 One-finger slide (touch screen)...............................................................................................................................27 Using an optional keyboard or mouse.............................................................................................................................27 Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only)......................................................................................................27 5Entertainment features .......................................................................................................................................................28 Using a camera (select products only) ............................................................................................................................28 Using audio ......................................................................................................................................................................28 Connecting speakers ...............................................................................................................................................28 Connecting headphones ..........................................................................................................................................28 Connecting headsets ..............................................................................................................................................29 Using sound settings ...............................................................................................................................................29 Viewing or changing sound settings ...............................................................................................................29 Using the control panel to view and control audio settings ...........................................................................29 Using video ......................................................................................................................................................................29 Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only)...............................................30 Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport.............................................................31 Connecting displays to computers with AMD or NVIDIA graphics (with an optional hub)..............................31 Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) ..............................................31 Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) ..................................................31 Using data transfer ..........................................................................................................................................................32 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ...........................................................................32 6Managing power...................................................................................................................................................................34 Using Sleep and Hibernation ..........................................................................................................................................34 Initiating and exiting Sleep......................................................................................................................................34 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) .......................................................................................35 Shutting down (turning off) the computer......................................................................................................................35 Using the Power icon ......................................................................................................................................................36 Running on battery power...............................................................................................................................................36 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only)...........................................................................................................36 Displaying battery charge .......................................................................................................................................36 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) ........................................................37 Conserving battery power .......................................................................................................................................37 Identifying low battery levels..................................................................................................................................37 Resolving a low battery level ..................................................................................................................................37 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available....................................................................38 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available..................................................................38 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ..................................................38 Factory-sealed battery............................................................................................................................................38 vi Running on external power .............................................................................................................................................38 7Security ................................................................................................................................................................................40 Protecting the computer .................................................................................................................................................40 Using passwords..............................................................................................................................................................41 Setting passwords in Windows ...............................................................................................................................41 Setting passwords in Computer Setup....................................................................................................................41 Managing a BIOS administrator password ..............................................................................................................42 Setting a new BIOS administrator password ..................................................................................................42 Changing a BIOS administrator password.......................................................................................................43 Deleting a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................................43 Entering a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................................44 Using DriveLock Security Options ...........................................................................................................................44 Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) ...................................................................................44 Enabling Automatic DriveLock ................................................................................................................44 Disabling Automatic DriveLock ...............................................................................................................45 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password ...........................................................................................45 Selecting manual DriveLock ............................................................................................................................45 Setting a DriveLock master password ....................................................................................................46 Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password ..........................................................................46 Disabling DriveLock .........................................................................................................................................47 Entering a DriveLock password.......................................................................................................................48 Changing a DriveLock password .....................................................................................................................48 Windows Hello (select products only) .............................................................................................................................48 Using antivirus software .................................................................................................................................................49 Using firewall software....................................................................................................................................................49 Installing software updates ............................................................................................................................................49 Using HP Client Security (select products only) ..............................................................................................................50 Using HP TechPulse (select products only) .....................................................................................................................50 Using an optional security cable (select products only) .................................................................................................50 Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) ...........................................................................................................50 8Maintenance.........................................................................................................................................................................51 Improving performance...................................................................................................................................................51 Using Disk Defragmenter ........................................................................................................................................51 Using Disk Cleanup ..................................................................................................................................................51 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ......................................................................................................51 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status ..............................................................................................................52 Updating programs and drivers ......................................................................................................................................52 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................................................52 Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only) .......................................................................................................52 Removing dirt and debris from your computer.......................................................................................................53 Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant ...........................................................................................................53 Caring for wood veneer (select products only) .......................................................................................................54 Traveling with or shipping your computer ......................................................................................................................54 vii 9Backing up, restoring, and recovering .................................................................................................................................56 Backing up information and creating recovery media ....................................................................................................56 Using Windows tools for backing up .......................................................................................................................56 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only)............................56 Restoring and recovering your system ...........................................................................................................................56 Creating a system restore .......................................................................................................................................57 Restoring and recovery methods ............................................................................................................................57 Recovering using HP Recovery media .....................................................................................................................57 Changing the computer boot order .........................................................................................................................58 Using HP Sure Recover (select products only) ........................................................................................................58 10Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start ..............................................................................................................59 Using Computer Setup.....................................................................................................................................................59 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup .........................................................................................................59 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup .......................................................................................................59 Updating the BIOS....................................................................................................................................................60 Determining the BIOS version .........................................................................................................................60 Preparing for a BIOS update ............................................................................................................................60 Downloading a BIOS update ....................................................................................................................61 Installing a BIOS update ..........................................................................................................................61 Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt .......................................................................................................61 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) .......................................................................................................................62 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) .....................................................................................................................62 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................................63 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) .............................................................................63 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code............................................................63 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows...................................................................................................63 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support (select products only)...........63 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant ..............................................64 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only) ....................64 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows .............................................................................................64 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP .........................................64 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) .......64 Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store..............................................65 Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ...................................................................................................65 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .........................................................................................................................65 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code ...................................................................65 Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI.............................................................................................................66 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive ....................................................................66 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ...............................................................66 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only)..........66 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) .........................................................67 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .......................................................................................67 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .................................................67 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ................................67 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings ..........................................................................67 viii 12Specifications.....................................................................................................................................................................69 Input power......................................................................................................................................................................69 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................................................70 13Electrostatic discharge ......................................................................................................................................................72 14Accessibility .......................................................................................................................................................................73 HP and accessibility .........................................................................................................................................................73 Finding the technology tools you need...................................................................................................................73 The HP commitment................................................................................................................................................73 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) .............................................................................74 Finding the best assistive technology.....................................................................................................................74 Assessing your needs ......................................................................................................................................74 Accessibility for HP products...........................................................................................................................74 Standards and legislation................................................................................................................................................75 Standards.................................................................................................................................................................75 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 .............................................................................................................................75 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG).................................................................................................75 Legislation and regulations.....................................................................................................................................75 Useful accessibility resources and links..........................................................................................................................76 Organizations ..........................................................................................................................................................76 Educational institutions ..........................................................................................................................................76 Other disability resources .......................................................................................................................................76 HP links ....................................................................................................................................................................77 Contacting support ..........................................................................................................................................................77 Index ........................................................................................................................................................................................78 ix 1 Getting started This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer and where to find additional HP resources. After you set up and register the computer, HP recommends the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

TIP: To quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop, press the Windows key on your keyboard. Pressing the Windows key again returns you to the previous screen. Connect to the internetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the internet. For more information, see Network connections on page 19. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 49. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Components on page 3 and Navigating the screen on page 24 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:

Select the Start button, and then select All apps. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Back up your hard driveCreate recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive to back up your hard drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 56. Access HP Support Assistant appFor quick online support, open the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). HP Support Assistant optimizes computer performance and resolves problems using the latest software updates, diagnostic tools, and guided assistance. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. Finding information To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Table 1-1 Additional information Resource Setup Instructions Contents Overview of computer setup and features Getting started 1 Contents Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) and proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer Table 1-1 Additional information (continued) Resource HP support For HP support, go to https://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. or Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP might provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1Getting started 2 Components Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where they are located, and how they work. Locating hardware Use these instructions to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type device manager in the search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software Use these instructions to find out what software is installed on your computer:

Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Right Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the right side of the computer. Components 3 Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions Component Description

(1) microSD card reader Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory card reader.

(2)

(3) USB Type-C power connector port, SuperSpeed 20 Gbps port, and DisplayPort output Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and (for select products) charges small devices (such as a smartphone) when the computer is on or in Sleep mode. NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-C charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device. and Connects a display device that has a USB Type-C connector, providing DisplayPort output. USB SuperSpeed 20 Gbps port with HP Sleep and Charge Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and charges small devices (such as a smartphone), even when the computer is off. NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-A charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device.

(4) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it might not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Left Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the left side of the computer. 4 Chapter 2Components Table 2-2 Left-side components and their descriptions Component Description

(1) Battery light When AC power is connected:

White: The battery charge is greater than 90%. Amber: The battery charge is from 0 to 90%. Off: The battery is not charging. When AC power is disconnected (battery not charging):

Blinking amber: The battery has reached a low battery level. When the battery has reached a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is not charging.

(2)

(3) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. USB Type-C power connectors and Thunderbolt ports with HP Sleep and Charge

(2) Connect a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and charges small devices (such as a smartphone), even when the computer is off.

(4) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-C charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device. NOTE: Your computer might also support a Thunderbolt docking station. and Connect a display device that has a USB Type-C connector, providing DisplayPort output. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Display Use the illustration and table to identify the display components. Display 5 Low blue light mode (select products only) Your computer display is shipped from the factory in low blue light mode for improved eye comfort and safety. Also, blue light mode automatically adjusts blue light emissions when you are using the computer at night or for reading. WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. The Safety & Comfort Guide is available on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. NOTE: Choose the illustration that matches your computer. Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions Component Description Infrared (IR) LEDs (2) On: Camera is operating.

(1)

(2) Camera (IR)*

Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product.

(3) Camera (Web)

(4) Webcam LED On: Camera is operating. 6 Chapter 2Components Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description

(5)

(6) Ambient light sensor Antennas (2)**

Detects light levels in the environment to adjust the camera's noise reduction levels. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).

*The infrared camera and lenses are not visible from the outside of the computer.

**The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Table 2-4 Display components and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2) Infrared LEDs (2) Camera (IR)*

Description On: Camera is operating. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. Low blue light mode (select products only) 7 Table 2-4 Display components and their descriptions (continued) Component

(3) Camera (Web) Description Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product.

(4)

(5)

(6) Web cam LED On: Camera is operating. Ambient light sensors (2) Antennas (2)**

Detect light levels in the environment to adjust the camera's noise reduction levels. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).

*The infrared camera and lenses are not visible from the outside of the computer.

**The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Keyboard area Keyboards can vary by language. NOTE: The keyboard, including the function keys and power key (select products only), is disabled in stand, tent, and tablet modes. To enable the keyboard, including the power key, change to the clamshell mode. Touchpad The touchpad settings and components are described here. Touchpad settings You learn how to adjust the touchpad settings and components here. Adjusting touchpad settings Use these steps to adjust touchpad settings and gestures. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type touchpad settings in the search box, and then press enter. 2. Choose a setting. Turning on the touchpad Follow these steps to turn on the touchpad. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type touchpad settings in the search box, and then press enter. 8 Chapter 2Components

2. Using an external mouse, click the Touchpad button. If you are not using an external mouse, press the Tab key repeatedly until the pointer rests on the touchpad button. Then press the spacebar to select the button. Touchpad components Use the illustration and table to identify the touchpad components. Table 2-5 Touchpad components and their descriptions Component Description Touchpad zone Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using touchpad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 24. Left touchpad zone Right touchpad zone Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse.

(1)

(2)

(3) Lights Use the illustration and table to identify the lights on the computer. Touchpad components 9 Table 2-6 Lights and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. Privacy key light (select products only) On: Privacy screen is on, which helps prevent side-angle viewing. Mute light Microphone mute light Camera privacy light Power light On: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Microphone is off. Off: Microphone is on. On: Camera is disabled. Off: Camera is enabled. On: The computer is on. Blinking (select products only): The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unnecessary components. Off: Depending on your computer model, the computer is off, in Hibernation, or in Sleep. Hibernation is the power-

saving state that uses the least amount of power.

(7) Fn lock light On: The fn key is locked. For more information, see Hot keys

(select products only) on page 15. 10 Chapter 2Components Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader Fingerprint readers can be located on the touchpad, on a side panel of the computer, or on the top cover below the keyboard. IMPORTANT: To verify that your computer supports fingerprint reader sign-in, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type Sign-in options in the search box, and then select the Sign-on options app. If Fingerprint recognition is not listed as an option, then your notebook does not include a fingerprint reader. Table 2-7 Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader and their descriptions Component

(1) Speakers Description Produce sound. Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader 11 Table 2-7 Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader and their descriptions (continued) Component

(2) Power key

(3) Fingerprint reader (select products only) Description When the computer is off, press the key briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the key briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the key briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the key briefly to exit Hibernation. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power key results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power key for at least 4 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, use the Power icon. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Swipe down across the fingerprint reader. See Windows Hello

(select products only) on page 48 for details. IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, make sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader. Special keys Use the illustration and table to identify the special keys. 12 Chapter 2Components Table 2-8 Special keys and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with another key. Such key combinations are called hot keys. See Hot keys (select products only) on page 15. Windows key Opens the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. Power button See Action keys on page 13. When the computer is off, press the button briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, use the Power icon. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings.

(6) Camera privacy switch Turns the camera off and on. NOTE: or more information, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28 Action keys Action keys perform specific functions and vary by computer. To determine which keys are on your computer, look at the icons on your keyboard and match them to the descriptions in this table. To use an action key, press and hold the key. NOTE: On some products, you must press the fn key in combination with the action key. Action keys 13 Table 2-9 Action keys and their descriptions Icon Description Switches the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing the key alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Helps prevent side-angle viewing from onlookers. If needed, decrease or increase brightness for well-lit or darker environments. Press the key again to turn off the privacy screen. NOTE: This feature is available only on select products. If the feature is not available on your computer, a message is displayed when you press this key. NOTE: To quickly turn on the highest privacy setting, press fn+p. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes the microphone. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. On select products, you can adjust the brightness of the keyboard backlight. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer), to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the touchpad (select products only). To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Press to switch between overtype mode and insert mode. Overtype mode: The cursor overwrites any existing text. Insert mode: The cursor inserts characters at its current position. 14 Chapter 2Components Table 2-9 Action keys and their descriptions (continued) Icon Description Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Executes frequently used tasks. Some tasks might not be available on all products. Opens an application, file, or website Enters frequently used text into a permanent clipboard Ability to change system profiles Ability to change system properties Executes user-defined key sequences NOTE: The action key feature is enabled at the factory. On select products only, you can disable this feature by pressing and holding the fn key and the left shift key. The fn lock light will turn on. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Hot keys (select products only) A hot key is the combination of the fn key and another key. Use the table to identify the hot keys. To use a hot key:

Press the fn key, and then press one of the keys listed in the following table. Table 2-10 Hot keys and their descriptions Key Description C E R S W Turns on scroll lock. Turns on the insert function. Breaks the operation. Sends a programing query. Pauses the operation. Bottom Use the illustration and table to identify the bottom components. Hot keys (select products only) 15

Table 2-11 Bottom components and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2) Speakers (2) Vent Description Produce sound. Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you might need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels might be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you might be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. 16 Chapter 2Components Table 2-12 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Serial number Product ID HP product name Table 2-13 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) HP product name Product ID Serial number Warranty period Table 2-14 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) HP product name Warranty period Product ID Labels 17 Table 2-14 Service label components (continued) Component

(4) Serial number Regulatory labelsProvide regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification labelsProvide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 18 Chapter 2Components 3 Network connections Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites by using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter helps you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer might be equipped with one or more wireless devices. WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select products only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations

(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 m (approximately 33 ft) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features. Wireless button (also called airplane mode key or wireless key) Operating system controls Wireless button The computer might have a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. Depending on your computer model, you have several methods to access operating system controls:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, and then select Control Panel. or On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Network and Internet settings. Network connections 19 Connecting to a WLAN Before you can connect to a WLAN with this procedure, you must first set up internet access. NOTE: When you are setting up internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an internet service provider (ISP). To purchase internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the internet service. 1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select the right arrow icon next to the Wi-Fi button to see the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you might be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE: Depending on your computer model, if you do not see the WLAN that you want to connect to, follow one of these methods:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Network and Internet settings. Select WiFi, and then select Manage known networks. Select the Add network button. A list of options is displayed, which allows you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI number, MEID number, or both to activate mobile broadband service. The number might be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. 1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon. Select Network and Internet settings. In the Network and Internet window, select Cellular, and then select Mobile operator settings. 20 Chapter 3Network connections Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it might be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information that is included with your computer or the mobile network operator might provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices. Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse External keyboard Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type bluetooth in the search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select Add device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device that you are adding, NOTE:

follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, see the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some NOTE:

devices might have additional requirements; see the documentation provided with the device. Connecting to a wired network Select products might allow a local area network (LAN) connection, which uses a network cable. The cable is sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) 21 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly) or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

NOTE: A feature called HP LAN-Wireless Protection might be enabled on your computer. It closes your wireless (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection when you connect directly to a LAN. For more information about HP LAN-Wireless Protection, see Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) on page 22. If there is no RJ-45 port on the computer, connecting to a LAN requires a network cable and a network jack or an optional docking device or expansion product. 1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer or on an optional docking device or expansion product. 2. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) In a LAN environment, you can set HP LAN-Wireless Protection to safeguard your LAN network from unauthorized wireless access. When HP LAN-Wireless Protection is enabled, the WLAN (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection is turned off when the computer is connected directly to a LAN. To turn on and customize HP LAN-Wireless Protection:

1. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and before the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

22 Chapter 3Network connections 2. 3. 4. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Built-in Device Options. Select the check box for LAN/WLAN Auto Switching, LAN/WWAN Auto Switching, or both to turn off WLAN connections, WWAN connections, or both when connected to a LAN network. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using HP MAC Address Pass Through (select products only) MAC Address Pass Through provides a customizable way of identifying your computer and its communications on networks. This system MAC address provides unique identification even when your computer is connected through a network adapter. This address is enabled by default. To customize MAC Address Pass Through:

1. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Advanced, and then select MAC Address Pass Through. In the box to the right of Host Based MAC Address, select either System Address to enable MAC address Pass Through or Custom Address to customize the address. If you selected Custom, select MAC ADDRESS, enter your customized system MAC address, and then press enter to save the address. If the computer has an embedded LAN and you would like to use the embedded MAC address as the system MAC address, select Reuse Embedded LAN Address. or Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using HP MAC Address Pass Through (select products only) 23 4 Navigating the screen Depending on your computer model, you can navigate the computer screen using one or more methods. Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen. Use touch gestures on the touchpad. Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately). Use an on-screen keyboard. Use a pointing stick. Using touchpad and touch screen gestures The touchpad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right touchpad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Some products include a precision touchpad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if you have a precision touchpad and find additional information, follow these steps, depending on your computer:

Select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the touchpad and a touch screen. Tap Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the touchpad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. 24 Chapter 4Navigating the screen Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) Place two fingers slightly apart on the touchpad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) Tap two fingers on the touchpad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse. Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger tap opens the search box. Tap three fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) 25 To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop. Swipe three fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe three fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe three fingers left or right to switch between open windows. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops. Swipe four fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe four fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe four fingers left or right to switch between desktops. 26 Chapter 4Navigating the screen To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. One-finger slide (touch screen) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) These instructions help you learn to use the on-screen keyboard. You can display the on-screen keyboard in several ways:

1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type on-screen keyboard in the search box, and then select On-Screen Keyboard. or 2. Press the Windows key +ctrl+o. NOTE: Suggested words might be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. One-finger slide (touch screen) 27 5 Entertainment features Use your HP computer for business or pleasure to meet with others via the camera, mix audio and video, or connect external devices like a projector, monitor, TV, or speakers. See Components on page 3 to locate the audio, video and camera features on your computer. Using a camera (select products only) Your computer has one or more cameras that enable you to connect with others for work or play. Most cameras allow you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Cameras can be front facing or rear facing. To determine which camera or cameras are on your product, see Components on page 3. To use your camera, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type camera in the search box, and then select Camera. Some cameras also feature HD (high-definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Security on page 40 for details about using Windows Hello. You can enhance your computer privacy by covering the lens with the camera privacy cover. By default, the camera lens is uncovered, but you can slide the camera privacy cover to block the camera's view. To use the camera, slide the camera privacy cover in the opposite direction to reveal the lens. Using audio You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select products) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach headphones or speakers. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones You can connect wired headphones to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

28 Chapter 5Entertainment features Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting headsets You can connect a headset to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. A stand-alone microphone can be plugged into a USB port. See your manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. Viewing or changing sound settings Use these instructions to view or change sound settings. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, and then select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using the control panel to view and control audio settings You can view or change sound settings using the audio control panel. Your computer might include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, DTS, Beats audio, or another provider. As a result, your computer might include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, select Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. Connecting headsets 29 To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your video features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) Connect a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable. NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C DisplayPort device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external DisplayPort device, connect the DisplayPort device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort connector on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external DisplayPort device. Press f4 to cycle through four display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, increase the screen resolution of the NOTE:

external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. 30 Chapter 5Entertainment features Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport MultiStream Transport (MST) allows you to connect multiple wired display devices to your computer by connecting to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on your computer and also to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on a hub or an external docking station. You can connect in several ways, depending on the type of graphics controller installed on your computer and whether your computer includes a built-in hub. Go to Device Manager to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Connecting displays to computers with AMD or NVIDIA graphics (with an optional hub) To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps. NOTE: With an AMD graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to six external display devices. NOTE: With an NVIDIA graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to four external display devices. 1. 2. 3. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort (DP) connector on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. Connect your external display devices to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on the hub. To see all of your connected display devices, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type device manager in the search box, and then select the Device Manager app. If you don't see all of your connected displays, be sure that each is connected to the correct port on the hub. NOTE: Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which spans your computer screen across all enabled display devices. Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps. NOTE: With an Intel graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to three display devices. 1. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort connector on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. 2. Connect your external display devices to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on the hub. 3. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DisplayPort hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Select the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the NOTE:

correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps. Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport 31 With your internal hub and Intel graphics controller, you can connect up to three display devices in the following configurations:

Two 1920 1200 DisplayPort monitors connected to the computer and one 1920 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station One 2560 1600 DisplayPort monitor connected to the computer and one 1920 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station 1. Connect your external display devices to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on the computer base or the docking station. 2. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DisplayPort hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Select the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. NOTE:

If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) To connect devices to a USB Type-C port, follow these steps. NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 32 Chapter 5Entertainment features 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) 33 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state automatically initiates after a period of inactivity. Your work is available in memory, allowing you to resume your work quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. Depending on your computer model, the Sleep state might also support Modern Standby mode. This mode keeps some internal operations awake and enables your computer to receive web notifications, such as emails, while in Sleep. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 34. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 35. IMPORTANT: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in several ways. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1 or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button (select products only). You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). Tap the touchpad (select products only). 34 Chapter 6Managing power When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. IMPORTANT:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type power in the search box, and then select Choose a power plan. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording might vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. 4. Select Save changes. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. IMPORTANT:

Windows password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Shutting down (turning off) the computer The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. IMPORTANT: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly NOTE:

pressing the power button. 1. Save your work and close all open programs. Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) 35 2. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Using the Power icon The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To view power settings, right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings. Different power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When the computer has a charged battery and is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time might vary by 10%. When the remaining battery charge is between 0 and 50%, the battery charges to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. 36 Chapter 6Managing power Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) Follow these steps to access battery information. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. Select Fixes & Diagnostics, select Check your battery, and then select Launch. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

HP Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power Follow these steps to conserve battery power and maximize battery life. Lower the brightness of the display. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the computer warns you in one of several ways. The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon on page 36. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level You can quickly resolve low battery level conditions. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) 37 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power. AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the battery level is low and you cannot bring the computer out of Hibernation, connect the AC adapter. 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). 1. Select the Search icon on the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) on the taskbar. 2. Select Fixes & Diagnostics, select Check your battery, and then select Launch. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Running on external power For information about connecting to external power, see the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or updating system software When updating the system BIOS 38 Chapter 6Managing power When writing information to a disc (select products only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge. The Power icon changes appearance. When you disconnect external power:

The computer switches to battery power. The Power icon changes appearance. Running on external power 39 7 Security Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, Computer Setup

(BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and Computer Setup (BIOS, which runs under any operating system) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Some features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://www.hp.com. Table 7-1 Security solutions Computer risk Security feature Unauthorized use of the computer HP Client Security software, in combination with a password, smart card, contactless card, registered fingerprints, or other authentication credential BIOS power-on password Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (BIOS) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock password (select products only) in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized startup from an optional external optical drive

(select products only), optional external hard drive (select products only), or internal network adapter Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data Windows BitLocker Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable on select products only)

*Computer Setup is an embedded, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. You can use a pointing device (touchpad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use the touch screen. 40 Chapter 7Security Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. You can set several types of passwords, depending on how you want to control access to your information. You can set passwords in Windows or in Computer Setup, which is preinstalled on the computer. BIOS administrator, power-on, and DriveLock passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. If you forget both the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password set in Computer Setup, the hard drive that is protected by the passwords is permanently locked and can no longer be used. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. Use the Password Manager feature of HP Client Security to store your user names and passwords for your websites and applications. You can securely read them in the future if they cannot be remembered. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Setting passwords in Windows Windows passwords can help protect your computer from unauthorized access. Table 7-2 Types of Windows passwords and their functions Password Function Administrator password*

Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. User password*

Protects access to a Windows user account.

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: Setting the Windows administrator password does not set the BIOS administrator password. Setting passwords in Computer Setup Computer Setup passwords provide additional layers of security for your computer. Using passwords 41 Table 7-3 Types of Computer Setup passwords and their functions Password Function BIOS administrator password*

Protects access to Computer Setup. Power-on password DriveLock master password*

DriveLock user password*

NOTE:

If features have been enabled to prevent removing the BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled. Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. This password is also used to remove DriveLock protection. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process.

*For details about each of these passwords, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps. Setting a new BIOS administrator password A BIOS administrator password helps prevent unauthorized access to Computer Setup. Use these instructions to set a new BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. Select Security, select Create BIOS administrator password or Set Up BIOS administrator Password

(select products only), and then press enter. 3. When prompted, type a password. 4. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 5. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. 42 Chapter 7Security Changing a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to change a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password. 6. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to delete a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. Changing a BIOS administrator password 43 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same keys that you used to set the password), and then press enter. After two unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Using DriveLock Security Options DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drives of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, the appropriate password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer or an advanced port replicator for it to be unlocked. DriveLock Security Options offers the following features:

Automatic DriveLockSee Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) on page 44. Set DriveLock Master PasswordSee Selecting manual DriveLock on page 45. Enable DriveLockSee Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 46. Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) You must set a BIOS administrator password before you can enable Automatic DriveLock. When Automatic DriveLock is enabled, a random DriveLock user password and a DriveLock master password derived from the BIOS administrator password are created. When the computer is turned on, the random user password automatically unlocks the drive. If the drive is moved to another computer, you must enter the BIOS administrator password for the original computer at the DriveLock password prompt to unlock the drive. Enabling Automatic DriveLock To enable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. 44 Chapter 7Security 3. 4. 5. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to select the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Disabling Automatic DriveLock To disable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to clear the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering an Automatic DriveLock password While Automatic DriveLock is enabled and the drive remains attached to the original computer, you will not be prompted to enter a DriveLock password to unlock the drive. However, if the drive is moved to another computer, or the system board is replaced on the original computer, you will be prompted to provide the DriveLock password. If this happens, at the DriveLock Password prompt, type the BIOS administrator password for the original computer (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter to unlock the drive. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Selecting manual DriveLock To manually apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, you must set a master password, and DriveLock must be enabled in Computer Setup. Disabling Automatic DriveLock 45 IMPORTANT: To prevent a DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, you can access the hard drive only by entering either the DriveLock user password or the master password. The owner of the DriveLock user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the DriveLock master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password can be identical. Setting a DriveLock master password To set a DriveLock master password, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, make the selection for Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Set DriveLock Master Password, and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock master password. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. NOTE: You can enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password before exiting from Computer Setup. For more information, see Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 46. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password To enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password, follow these steps. 46 Chapter 7Security 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Enable DriveLock and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock user password and enable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Disabling DriveLock To disable DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. Select Disable DriveLock, and then press enter. Follow the on-screen instructions to disable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disabling DriveLock 47 Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your DriveLock user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Changing a DriveLock password To change a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn off the computer. Press the power button. At the DriveLock Password prompt, type the current DriveLock user password or master password that you are changing, press enter, and then press or tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. 6. Make the selection for the DriveLock password that you want to change, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enter passwords. NOTE: The Change DriveLock Master Password option is visible only if the DriveLock master password was provided at the DriveLock Password prompt in step 3. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, Windows Hello allows you to enroll your fingerprint and your facial ID, and set up a PIN. After enrollment, you can use your fingerprint reader, facial ID, or PIN to sign in to Windows. To set up Windows Hello:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. If you do not have a password set up, you must add one before you can use other sign-in options. Select Password, and then select Add. Under Facial recognition (Windows Hello) or Fingerprint recognition (Windows Hello), select Set up. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, be sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader. 48 Chapter 7Security NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access email, a network, or the internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage that they cause. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Windows Defender is preinstalled on your computer. HP strongly recommends that you continue to use an antivirus program to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, access the HP Support Assistant. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program that you install on your computer, network, or both, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized email attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. To view or change the settings:

IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. Using antivirus software 49 1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Windows Update. Follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Client Security (select products only) HP Client Security software is preinstalled on your computer. You can access this software through the HP Client Security icon at the far right of the taskbar or Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that help protect against unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. Using HP TechPulse (select products only) HP TechPulse is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP TechPulse helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost-effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hpdaas.com/. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select products. To use the fingerprint reader, you must enroll your fingerprints in HP Client Security's Credential Manager. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. After you enroll your fingerprints in Credential Manager, you can use HP Client Security's Password Manager to store and fill in your user names and passwords in supported websites and applications. The fingerprint reader is a small metallic sensor that is located in one of the following areas of your computer:

Near the bottom of the touchpad On the right side of the keyboard On the upper-right side of the display On the left side of the display On the back of the display Depending on your product, the reader may be oriented horizontally or vertically. 50 Chapter 7Security 8 Maintenance Performing regular maintenance keeps your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. Connect the computer to AC power. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type defragment in the search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type disk in the search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under some conditions. You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. Maintenance 51 NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay, the secondary hard drive bay (select products only), or both are parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers regularly. Updates can resolve issues and provide new features and options. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you do not get the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. To update your programs and drivers, follow these steps. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. 3. Under My notebook, select Updates. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Cleaning your computer regularly removes dirt and debris so that your device continues to operate at its best. Use the following information to safely clean the external surfaces of your computer. Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only) HP Easy Clean helps you to avoid accidental input while you clean the computer surfaces. This software disables devices such as the keyboard, touch screen, and touchpad for a preset amount of time so that you can clean all computer surfaces. 1. Start HP Easy Clean in one of the following ways:

Select the Start button, and then select HP Easy Clean. or Select the HP Easy Clean icon in the taskbar. or Select the Start button, and then select the HP Easy Clean tile. 2. Now that your device is disabled for a short period, see Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 53 for the recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer. After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning your 52 Chapter 8Maintenance computer with a disinfectant on page 53 for guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Removing dirt and debris from your computer Here are the recommended steps to clean dirt and debris from your computer. For computers with wood veneer, see Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 54. 1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. 2. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 53 for recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant The World Health Organization (WHO) recommends cleaning surfaces, followed by disinfection, as a best practice for preventing the spread of viral respiratory illnesses and harmful bacteria. After cleaning the external surfaces of your computer using the steps in Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 53, Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 54, or both, you might also choose to clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. A disinfectant that is within HPs cleaning guidelines is an alcohol solution consisting of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. This solution is also known as rubbing alcohol and is sold in most stores. Follow these steps when disinfecting high-touch, external surfaces on your computer:

1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. Removing dirt and debris from your computer 53 2. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with a mixture of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. CAUTION: Do not use any of the following chemicals or any solutions that contain them, including spray-based surface cleaners: bleach, peroxides (including hydrogen peroxide), acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, methylene chloride, or any petroleum-based materials, such as gasoline, paint thinner, benzene, or toluene. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. Caring for wood veneer (select products only) Your product might feature high-quality wood veneer. As with all natural wood products, proper care is important for best results over the life of the product. Because of the nature of natural wood, you might see unique variations in the grain pattern or subtle variations in color, which are normal. Clean the wood with a dry, static-free microfiber cloth or chamois. Avoid cleaning products containing substances such as ammonia, methylene chloride, acetone, turpentine, or other petroleum-based solvents. Do not expose the wood to sun or moisture for long periods of time. If the wood becomes wet, dry it by dabbing with an absorbent, lint-free cloth. Avoid contact with any substance that might dye or discolor the wood. Avoid contact with sharp objects or rough surfaces that might scratch the wood. See Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 53 for the recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer. After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 53 for sanitizing guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you must travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. 54 Chapter 8Maintenance Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. IMPORTANT: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you can use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices might be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions might apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to run the computer with a voltage converter kit that is sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 55 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering You can use Windows tools or HP software to back up your information, create a restore point, reset your computer, create recovery media, or restore your computer to its factory state. Performing these standard procedures can return your computer to a working state faster. IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before Backing up information and creating recovery media These methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select products only. Using Windows tools for backing up HP recommends that you back up your information immediately after initial setup. You can do this task either using Windows Backup locally with an external USB drive or using online tools. IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive. For details:

Go to http://www.hp.com, search for HP Cloud Recovery, and then select the result that matches the type of computer that you have. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 57 to restore your computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your machine to a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling all the operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process. Restoring and recovering your system You have several tools available to recover your system both within and outside of Windows if the desktop cannot load. 56 Chapter 9Backing up, restoring, and recovering HP recommends that you attempt to restore your system using the Restoring and recovery methods on page 57. Creating a system restore System Restore is available in Windows. The System Restore software can automatically or manually create restore points, or snapshots, of the system files and settings on the computer at a particular point. When you use System Restore, it returns your computer to its state at the time you made the restore point. Your personal files and documents should not be affected. Restoring and recovery methods After you run the first method, test to see whether the issue still exists before you proceed to the next method, which might now be unnecessary. 1. 2. Run a Microsoft System Restore. Run Reset this PC. NOTE: The options Remove everything and then Fully clean the drive can take several hours to complete and leave no information on your computer. It is the safest way to reset your computer before you recycle it. 3. Recover using HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery media on page 57. For more information about the first two methods, see the Get Help app:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select the Get Help app, and then enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the internet to access the Get Help app. Recovering using HP Recovery media You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. On select products, it can be created on a bootable USB flash drive using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool. For details, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 56. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To recover your system:

Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. NOTE: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 57 to restore your computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your machine to a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling all the operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process. Creating a system restore 57 Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart using the HP Recovery media, you can change the computer boot order, the order of devices listed in BIOS for startup information. You can select an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before To change the boot order:

1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. For computers or tablets with keyboards attached, turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards, turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume up button, and then select f9. or Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Sure Recover (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Recover, a PC operating system (OS) recovery solution built into the hardware and software. HP Sure Recover can fully restore the HP OS image without installed recovery software. Using HP Sure Recover, an administrator or user can restore the system and install:

Latest version of the operating system Platform-specific device drivers Software applications, in the case of a custom image To access the latest documentation for HP Sure Recover, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Follow the on-screen instructions to find your product and locate your documentation. 58 Chapter 9Backing up, restoring, and recovering 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start HP provides several tools to help set up and protect your computer. Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as hard drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. To start Computer Setup, turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup You can navigate and select in Computer Setup using one or more methods. To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps. NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start 59 1. 2. Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 59. Select Main, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. NOTE: On select products, the selections might display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS might be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. If you are already in Windows, you can access BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) by pressing fn+esc (select products only). Or you can use Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 59. Select Main, and then select System Information. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To check for later BIOS versions, see Preparing for a BIOS update on page 60. Preparing for a BIOS update Be sure to follow all prerequisites before downloading and installing a BIOS update. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 60 Chapter 10Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start Downloading a BIOS update After you review the prerequisites, you can check for and download BIOS updates. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

2. 3. 4. a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You might need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. Installing a BIOS update BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type file in the search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps. 1. Access the Boot Device Options menu:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. 2. Select a boot device, press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading a BIOS update 61 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup

(BIOS). IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation or usage of TPM that violates the previously mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will not be responsible for any related liabilities. NOTE:

If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system. To access TPM settings in Computer Setup:

1. 2. Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 59. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Sure Start (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that monitors the computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. Advanced users can customize the default configuration. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 62 Chapter 10Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics You can use the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics utility to determine whether your computer hardware is running properly. The three versions are HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI

(Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), and (for select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, a firmware feature. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 64. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit failure ID code is generated for select component tests. For interactive tests, such as keyboard, mouse, or audio and video palette, you must perform troubleshooting steps before you can receive a failure ID. You have several options after you receive a failure ID:

Select Next to open the Event Automation Service (EAS) page, where you can log the case. or Scan the QR code with your mobile device, which takes you to the EAS page, where you can log the case. or Select the box next to the 24-digit failure ID to copy your failure code and send it to support. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, you can access it from HP Support Assistant or the Start menu. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support (select products only) After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 3. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 63 NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Support Assistant. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. 3. Select Fixes & Diagnostics. Select Run Hardware diagnostics, and then select Launch. 4. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only) After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from the Start menu. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select All apps. Select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 3. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows downloading instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP, follow these steps. 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics Windows, and then select the specific Windows diagnostics version to download to your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool downloads to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. 64 Chapter 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the Diagnostics section, select Download, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select the specific Windows diagnostics version to be downloaded to your computer or USB flash drive. The tool downloads to the selected location. Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store You can download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store. 1. Select the Microsoft Store app on your desktop. or Select the Search icon in the taskbar, and then type Microsoft Store in the search box. Enter HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows in the Microsoft Store search box. Follow the on-screen directions. 2. 3. The tool downloads to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. For some products, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create NOTE:

the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 66. If your PC does not start in Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit failure ID code is generated. For assistance in solving the problem:

Select Contact HP, accept the HP privacy disclaimer, and then use a mobile device to scan the failure ID code that appears on the next screen. The HP Customer Support - Service Center page appears with your failure ID and product number automatically filled in. Follow the on-screen instructions. or Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store 65 Contact support, and provide the failure ID code. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow this procedure. 1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 66. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in some situations. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstallation image. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive, follow this procedure. 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. 66 Chapter 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it might upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information about Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a SoftPaq that you can download to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version You can download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive. 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number You can download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software by using the product name or NOTE:

number. 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform several customizations. Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a hard drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) 67 Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password that you use for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. 68 Chapter 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 12 Specifications When you travel with or store your computer, the input power ratings and operating specifications provide helpful information. Input power The power information in this section might be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100 V240 V, 50 Hz60 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within one or more of the following specifications. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Specifications 69 Table 12-1 DC power specifications Input Power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /

15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Operating environment Use the operating specifications for helpful information when you travel with or store your computer. Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C Nonoperating 20C to 60C Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) 41F to 95F 4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

70 Chapter 12Specifications Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications (continued) Factor Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 15 m to 3,048 m 15 m to 12,192 m 50 ft to 10,000 ft 50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 71 13 Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 72 Chapter 13Electrostatic discharge 14 Accessibility HP's goal is to design, produce, and market products, services, and information that everyone everywhere can use, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate third-party assistive technology (AT) devices or applications. HP and accessibility Because HP works to weave diversity, inclusion, and work/life into the fabric of the company, it is reflected in everything HP does. HP strives to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 74. The HP commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports the company's diversity objectives and helps ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. The HP accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve that goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide HP actions. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within HP, and provide employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features, and make information about HP products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that improves assistive technology relevant to HP products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. Accessibility 73 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. As a founding member, HP joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports HPs accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that people with disabilities can effectively use. IAAP will make the profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You can choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, can also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products These links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable and available in your country or region, that are included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and products most appropriate for your situation. HP Aging & Accessibility: Go to http://www.hp.com, type Accessibility in the search box. Select Office of Aging and Accessibility. HP computers: For Windows products, go to http://www.hp.com/support, type Windows Accessibility Options in the Search our knowledge search box. Select the appropriate operating system in the results. HP Shopping, peripherals for HP products: Go to http://store.hp.com, select Shop, and then select Monitors or Accessories. If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 77. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

74 Chapter 14Accessibility Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows and Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) Standards and legislation Countries worldwide are enacting regulations to improve access to products and services for persons with disabilities. These regulations are historically applicable to telecommunications products and services, PCs and printers with certain communications and video playback features, their associated user documentation, and their customer support. Standards The US Access Board created Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-

based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multimedia, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The European Union created the EN 301 549 standard within Mandate 376 as an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. These links provide information about key legislation, regulations, and standards. Standards and legislation 75 United States Canada Europe Australia Useful accessibility resources and links These organizations, institutions, and resources might be good sources of information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you encounter on the internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations These organizations are a few of the many that provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions Many educational institutions, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-

related limitations. California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources Many resources, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program 76 Chapter 14Accessibility ILO Global Business and Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable HP links These HP-specific links provide information that relates to disabilities and age-related limitations. HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales Contacting support HP offers technical support and assistance with accessibility options for customers with disabilities. NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. HP links 77 Index A accessibility 73-75, 77 accessibility needs assessment 74 action keys 13 identifying 13 keyboard backlight 14 mute 14 privacy screen 14 screen brightness 14 speaker volume 14 switch screen image 14 using 13 wireless 15 administrator password 41 airplane mode key 19 ambient light sensor 7, 8 identifying 7, 8 antivirus software 49 assistive technology (AT) finding 74 purpose 73 AT (assistive technology) finding 74 purpose 73 audio 28 adjusting volume 14 headphones 28 headsets 29 sound settings 29 speakers 28 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack, identifying 5 Automatic Drivelock selecting 44 Automatic DriveLock disabling 45 enabling 44 Automatic DriveLock password entering 45 B backup, creating 56 backups 56 battery conserving power 37 discharging 37 78 Index factory-sealed 38 finding information 37 low battery levels 37 resolving low battery level 37, 38 battery charge 36 battery information, finding 37 battery light 5 battery power 36 BIOS determining version 60 downloading an update 60, 61 updating 60 Bluetooth device 19, 21 Bluetooth label 16 boot order changing using the f9 prompt 61 boot order, changing 58 buttons camera 13 left Touchpad 9 power 12, 13 right Touchpad 9 C camera 6-8 identifying 6-8 using 28 camera disable button, identifying 13 camera privacy cover using 28 camera privacy light, identifying 10 caps lock light, identifying 10 caring for your computer 52 cleaning your computer 52 caring for wood veneer 54 disinfecting 53 HP Easy Clean 52 removing dirt and debris 53 components bottom 15 display 5, 6 keyboard area 8 left side 4 right side 3 Computer Setup BIOS administrator password 42-44 navigating and selecting 59 restoring factory settings 59 starting 59 connecting to a WLAN 20 connector, power 5 corporate WLAN connection 20 critical battery level 37 customer support, accessibility 77 D data transfer 32 Disk Cleanup software 51 Disk Defragmenter software 51 display components 5, 6 DriveLock description 45 disabling 47 enabling 46 DriveLock master password changing 48 DriveLock password changing 48 entering 48 setting 46 DriveLock Security Options 44 E electrostatic discharge 72 esc key, identifying 13 external power, using 38 F factory-sealed battery 38 fingerprint reader 50 fingerprint reader, identifying 12 fingerprints, registering 48 firewall software 49 fn key, identifying 13 fn lock light, identifying 10 four-finger swipe touchpad gesture 26 four-finger tap touchpad gesture 26 G gesture 26 H hardware, locating 3 headphones, connecting 28 headsets, connecting 29 Hibernation exiting 35 initiated during critical battery level 37 initiating 35 hot keys break 15 insert 15 microphone mute 14 pause 15 programming query 15 scroll lock 15 using 15 HP 3D DriveGuard 51 HP Assistive Policy 73 HP Client Security 50 HP Fast Charge 36 HP LAN-Wireless Protection 22 HP MAC Address Pass Through 23 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading 66 failure ID code 65 starting 66 using 65 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows accessing 63, 64 downloading 64, 65 failure ID code 63 installing 65 using 63 HP Recovery media recovery 57 HP resources 1 HP Sure Recover 58 HP TechPulse 50 I infrared LEDs, identifying 6, 7 initiating Sleep and Hibernation 34 input power 69 International Association of Accessibility Professionals 74 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo 5 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 27 operating environment 70 K P keyboard and optional mouse passwords using 27 keyboard backlight action key 14 keys action 13 esc 13 fn 13 Windows 13 L labels Bluetooth 16 regulatory 16 serial number 16 service 16 wireless certification 16 WLAN 16 left side components 4 lights AC adapter and battery 5 battery 5 camera privacy 10 caps lock 10 fn lock 10 microphone mute 10 power 10 privacy key 10 lights, mute 10 low battery level 37 low blue light mode 6 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 51 Disk Defragmenter 51 updating programs and drivers 52 managing power 34 memory card reader, identifying 4 microphone mute key, identifying 14 microphone mute light, identifying 10 mute light, identifying 10 mute volume action key 14 administrator 41 BIOS administrator 42-44 user 41 ports USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge 4 USB Type-C 32 USB Type-C DisplayPort 4 USB Type-C power connector 4 USB Type-C power connector and Thunderbolt port with HP Sleep and Charge 5 USB Type-C SuperSpeed 4 USB Type-C SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort 30 power battery 36 external 38 power button, identifying 13 power connector identifying 4, 5 identifying USB Type-C 5 power icon, using 36 power key, identifying 12 power lights 10 power settings, using 36 precision touchpad using 24 precision touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 26 four-finger tap 26 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 25 two-finger tap 25 privacy key light 10 privacy screen action key, identifying 14 product name and number, computer 16 public WLAN connection 20 R recovery 56 discs 57 media 57 Index 79 USB flash drive 57 recovery media 56 standards and legislation, accessibility 75 creating using HP Cloud Recovery SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort Download Tool 56 creating using Windows tools 56 regulatory information connector, connecting USB Type-

C 30 Sure Start using 62 regulatory label 16 wireless certification labels 16 Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics switch screen image action key 14 system restore 57 system restore point, creating 56 UEFI settings customizing 67 using 67 resources, accessibility 76 restoring 56 restoring and recovery methods 57 right side components 3 S screen brightness action keys 14 Section 508 accessibility standards 75 security cable 50 security cable slot, identifying 4 serial number, computer 16 service labels, locating 16 setup utility navigating and selecting 59 restoring factory settings 59 shipping the computer 54 shutdown 35 Sleep exiting 34 initiating 34 Sleep and Hibernation, initiating 34 slots security cable 4 software antivirus 49 Disk Cleanup 51 Disk Defragmenter 51 firewall 49 software installed, locating 3 software updates, installing 49 sound See audio sound settings, using 29 speaker volume action keys 14 speakers connecting 28 speakers, identifying 11 special keys, using 12 80 Index T tap touchpad and touch screen gesture 24 three-finger swipe touchpad gesture 26 three-finger tap touchpad gesture 25 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 27 touchpad settings 8 using 24 touchpad and touch screen gestures tap 24 two-finger pinch zoom 24 Touchpad buttons identifying 9 touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 26 four-finger tap 26 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 25 two-finger tap 25 Touchpad zone, identifying 9 TPM settings 62 transfer data 32 traveling with the computer 16, 54 turning off the computer 35 two-finger pinch zoom touchpad and touch screen gesture 24 two-finger slide touchpad gesture 25 two-finger tap touchpad gesture 25 U unresponsive system 35 updating programs and drivers 52 USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 4 USB Type-C port, connecting 30, 32 USB Type-C power connector and Thunderbolt port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 5 USB Type-C power connector port, identifying 4 USB Type-C SuperSpeed port, identifying 4 user password 41 using passwords 41 using the keyboard and optional mouse 27 using the touchpad 24 V vents, identifying 16 video 29 DisplayPort device 30 USB Type-C 30 volume adjusting 14 mute 14 W web cam LEDs, identifying 6, 8 Windows backup 56 recovery media 56 system restore point 56 Windows Hello using 48 Windows key, identifying 13 Windows tools, using 56 wireless action key 15 wireless button 19 wireless certification label 16 wireless controls button 19 operating system 19 wireless key 19 wireless light 19 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 20 corporate WLAN connection 20 functional range 20 public WLAN connection 20 WLAN device 16 WLAN label 16 WWAN device 19, 20

User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides information about components, network connection, power management, security, backing up, and more. Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Legal information Copyright 2022 HP Development Company, L.P. Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features might not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows is automatically updated, which is always enabled. High-speed internet and Microsoft account required. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. See http://www.windows.com. If your product ships with Windows in S Mode: Windows in S Mode works exclusively with apps from the Microsoft Store within Windows. Certain default settings, features, and apps cannot be changed. Some accessories and apps that are compatible with Windows may not work (including some antivirus, PDF writers, driver utilities, and accessibility apps), and performance may vary, even if you switch out of S Mode. If you switch to Windows, you cannot switch back to S Mode. Learn more at Windows.com/SmodeFAQ. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, Pentium, and Thunderbolt are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. NVIDIA and the NVIDIA logo are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. The microSD logo and microSD are trademarks of SD-3C LLC. USB Type-C and USB-C are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum. DisplayPort and the DisplayPort logo are trademarks owned by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) in the United States and other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Sound is a trademark of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved

. Second Edition: May 2022 First Edition: January 2022 Document Part Number: N05887-002 Safety warning notice Reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer by following the practices described. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. iii Processor configuration setting (select products only) Important information about processor configurations. IMPORTANT: Select computer products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. iv Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1Getting started.......................................................................................................................................................................1 Finding information ...........................................................................................................................................................1 2Components ...........................................................................................................................................................................3 Locating hardware .............................................................................................................................................................3 Locating software..............................................................................................................................................................3 Right...................................................................................................................................................................................3 Left.....................................................................................................................................................................................4 Display ...............................................................................................................................................................................5 Low blue light mode (select products only) ..............................................................................................................6 Keyboard area....................................................................................................................................................................8 Touchpad ...................................................................................................................................................................8 Touchpad settings .............................................................................................................................................8 Adjusting touchpad settings .....................................................................................................................8 Turning on the touchpad ...........................................................................................................................8 Touchpad components ......................................................................................................................................9 Lights .........................................................................................................................................................................9 Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader ..........................................................................................................11 Special keys .............................................................................................................................................................12 Action keys...............................................................................................................................................................13 Hot keys (select products only) ...............................................................................................................................15 Bottom .............................................................................................................................................................................15 Labels...............................................................................................................................................................................16 3Network connections ...........................................................................................................................................................19 Connecting to a wireless network ...................................................................................................................................19 Using the wireless controls .....................................................................................................................................19 Wireless button ...............................................................................................................................................19 Operating system controls..............................................................................................................................19 Connecting to a WLAN .............................................................................................................................................20 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) ................................................................................................20 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only)........................................................................................21 Connecting Bluetooth devices.........................................................................................................................21 Connecting to a wired network........................................................................................................................................21 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only)...........................................................................22 Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) ......................................................................................22 Using HP MAC Address Pass Through (select products only) .........................................................................................23 4Navigating the screen ..........................................................................................................................................................24 Using touchpad and touch screen gestures ....................................................................................................................24 Tap ...........................................................................................................................................................................24 v Two-finger pinch zoom............................................................................................................................................24 Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) .............................................................................................25 Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ...............................................................................................25 Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad).............................................................................................25 Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ...............................................................................................26 Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad).........................................................................................26 Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) ..................................................................................................................26 One-finger slide (touch screen)...............................................................................................................................27 Using an optional keyboard or mouse.............................................................................................................................27 Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only)......................................................................................................27 5Entertainment features .......................................................................................................................................................28 Using a camera (select products only) ............................................................................................................................28 Using audio ......................................................................................................................................................................28 Connecting speakers ...............................................................................................................................................28 Connecting headphones ..........................................................................................................................................28 Connecting headsets ..............................................................................................................................................29 Using sound settings ...............................................................................................................................................29 Viewing or changing sound settings ...............................................................................................................29 Using the control panel to view and control audio settings ...........................................................................29 Using video ......................................................................................................................................................................29 Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only)...............................................30 Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport.............................................................31 Connecting displays to computers with AMD or NVIDIA graphics (with an optional hub)..............................31 Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) ..............................................31 Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) ..................................................31 Using data transfer ..........................................................................................................................................................32 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ...........................................................................32 6Managing power...................................................................................................................................................................34 Using Sleep and Hibernation ..........................................................................................................................................34 Initiating and exiting Sleep......................................................................................................................................34 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) .......................................................................................35 Shutting down (turning off) the computer......................................................................................................................35 Using the Power icon ......................................................................................................................................................36 Running on battery power...............................................................................................................................................36 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only)...........................................................................................................36 Displaying battery charge .......................................................................................................................................36 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) ........................................................37 Conserving battery power .......................................................................................................................................37 Identifying low battery levels..................................................................................................................................37 Resolving a low battery level ..................................................................................................................................37 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available....................................................................38 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available..................................................................38 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ..................................................38 Factory-sealed battery............................................................................................................................................38 vi Running on external power .............................................................................................................................................38 7Security ................................................................................................................................................................................40 Protecting the computer .................................................................................................................................................40 Using passwords..............................................................................................................................................................41 Setting passwords in Windows ...............................................................................................................................41 Setting passwords in Computer Setup....................................................................................................................41 Managing a BIOS administrator password ..............................................................................................................42 Setting a new BIOS administrator password ..................................................................................................42 Changing a BIOS administrator password.......................................................................................................43 Deleting a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................................43 Entering a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................................44 Using DriveLock Security Options ...........................................................................................................................44 Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) ...................................................................................44 Enabling Automatic DriveLock ................................................................................................................44 Disabling Automatic DriveLock ...............................................................................................................45 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password ...........................................................................................45 Selecting manual DriveLock ............................................................................................................................45 Setting a DriveLock master password ....................................................................................................46 Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password ..........................................................................46 Disabling DriveLock .........................................................................................................................................47 Entering a DriveLock password.......................................................................................................................48 Changing a DriveLock password .....................................................................................................................48 Windows Hello (select products only) .............................................................................................................................48 Using antivirus software .................................................................................................................................................49 Using firewall software....................................................................................................................................................49 Installing software updates ............................................................................................................................................49 Using HP Client Security (select products only) ..............................................................................................................50 Using HP TechPulse (select products only) .....................................................................................................................50 Using an optional security cable (select products only) .................................................................................................50 Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) ...........................................................................................................50 8Maintenance.........................................................................................................................................................................51 Improving performance...................................................................................................................................................51 Using Disk Defragmenter ........................................................................................................................................51 Using Disk Cleanup ..................................................................................................................................................51 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ......................................................................................................51 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status ..............................................................................................................52 Updating programs and drivers ......................................................................................................................................52 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................................................52 Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only) .......................................................................................................52 Removing dirt and debris from your computer.......................................................................................................53 Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant ...........................................................................................................53 Caring for wood veneer (select products only) .......................................................................................................54 Traveling with or shipping your computer ......................................................................................................................54 vii 9Backing up, restoring, and recovering .................................................................................................................................56 Backing up information and creating recovery media ....................................................................................................56 Using Windows tools for backing up .......................................................................................................................56 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only)............................56 Restoring and recovering your system ...........................................................................................................................56 Creating a system restore .......................................................................................................................................57 Restoring and recovery methods ............................................................................................................................57 Recovering using HP Recovery media .....................................................................................................................57 Changing the computer boot order .........................................................................................................................58 Using HP Sure Recover (select products only) ........................................................................................................58 10Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start ..............................................................................................................59 Using Computer Setup.....................................................................................................................................................59 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup .........................................................................................................59 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup .......................................................................................................59 Updating the BIOS....................................................................................................................................................60 Determining the BIOS version .........................................................................................................................60 Preparing for a BIOS update ............................................................................................................................60 Downloading a BIOS update ....................................................................................................................61 Installing a BIOS update ..........................................................................................................................61 Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt .......................................................................................................61 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) .......................................................................................................................62 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) .....................................................................................................................62 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................................63 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) .............................................................................63 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code............................................................63 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows...................................................................................................63 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support (select products only)...........63 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant ..............................................64 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only) ....................64 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows .............................................................................................64 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP .........................................64 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) .......64 Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store..............................................65 Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ...................................................................................................65 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .........................................................................................................................65 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code ...................................................................65 Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI.............................................................................................................66 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive ....................................................................66 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ...............................................................66 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only)..........66 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) .........................................................67 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .......................................................................................67 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .................................................67 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ................................67 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings ..........................................................................67 viii 12Specifications.....................................................................................................................................................................69 Input power......................................................................................................................................................................69 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................................................70 13Electrostatic discharge ......................................................................................................................................................72 14Accessibility .......................................................................................................................................................................73 HP and accessibility .........................................................................................................................................................73 Finding the technology tools you need...................................................................................................................73 The HP commitment................................................................................................................................................73 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) .............................................................................74 Finding the best assistive technology.....................................................................................................................74 Assessing your needs ......................................................................................................................................74 Accessibility for HP products...........................................................................................................................74 Standards and legislation................................................................................................................................................75 Standards.................................................................................................................................................................75 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 .............................................................................................................................75 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG).................................................................................................75 Legislation and regulations.....................................................................................................................................75 Useful accessibility resources and links..........................................................................................................................76 Organizations ..........................................................................................................................................................76 Educational institutions ..........................................................................................................................................76 Other disability resources .......................................................................................................................................76 HP links ....................................................................................................................................................................77 Contacting support ..........................................................................................................................................................77 Index ........................................................................................................................................................................................78 ix 1 Getting started This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer and where to find additional HP resources. After you set up and register the computer, HP recommends the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

TIP: To quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop, press the Windows key on your keyboard. Pressing the Windows key again returns you to the previous screen. Connect to the internetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the internet. For more information, see Network connections on page 19. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 49. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Components on page 3 and Navigating the screen on page 24 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:

Select the Start button, and then select All apps. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Back up your hard driveCreate recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive to back up your hard drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 56. Access HP Support Assistant appFor quick online support, open the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). HP Support Assistant optimizes computer performance and resolves problems using the latest software updates, diagnostic tools, and guided assistance. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. Finding information To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Table 1-1 Additional information Resource Setup Instructions Contents Overview of computer setup and features Getting started 1 Contents Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) and proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer Table 1-1 Additional information (continued) Resource HP support For HP support, go to https://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. or Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP might provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1Getting started 2 Components Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where they are located, and how they work. Locating hardware Use these instructions to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type device manager in the search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software Use these instructions to find out what software is installed on your computer:

Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Right Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the right side of the computer. Components 3 Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions Component Description

(1) microSD card reader Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory card reader.

(2)

(3) USB Type-C power connector port, SuperSpeed 20 Gbps port, and DisplayPort output Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and (for select products) charges small devices (such as a smartphone) when the computer is on or in Sleep mode. NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-C charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device. and Connects a display device that has a USB Type-C connector, providing DisplayPort output. USB SuperSpeed 20 Gbps port with HP Sleep and Charge Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and charges small devices (such as a smartphone), even when the computer is off. NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-A charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device.

(4) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it might not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Left Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the left side of the computer. 4 Chapter 2Components Table 2-2 Left-side components and their descriptions Component Description

(1) Battery light When AC power is connected:

White: The battery charge is greater than 90%. Amber: The battery charge is from 0 to 90%. Off: The battery is not charging. When AC power is disconnected (battery not charging):

Blinking amber: The battery has reached a low battery level. When the battery has reached a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is not charging.

(2)

(3) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. USB Type-C power connectors and Thunderbolt ports with HP Sleep and Charge

(2) Connect a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and charges small devices (such as a smartphone), even when the computer is off.

(4) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-C charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device. NOTE: Your computer might also support a Thunderbolt docking station. and Connect a display device that has a USB Type-C connector, providing DisplayPort output. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Display Use the illustration and table to identify the display components. Display 5 Low blue light mode (select products only) Your computer display is shipped from the factory in low blue light mode for improved eye comfort and safety. Also, blue light mode automatically adjusts blue light emissions when you are using the computer at night or for reading. WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. The Safety & Comfort Guide is available on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. NOTE: Choose the illustration that matches your computer. Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions Component Description Infrared (IR) LEDs (2) On: Camera is operating.

(1)

(2) Camera (IR)*

Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product.

(3) Camera (Web)

(4) Webcam LED On: Camera is operating. 6 Chapter 2Components Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description

(5)

(6) Ambient light sensor Antennas (2)**

Detects light levels in the environment to adjust the camera's noise reduction levels. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).

*The infrared camera and lenses are not visible from the outside of the computer.

**The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Table 2-4 Display components and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2) Infrared LEDs (2) Camera (IR)*

Description On: Camera is operating. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. Low blue light mode (select products only) 7 Table 2-4 Display components and their descriptions (continued) Component

(3) Camera (Web) Description Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product.

(4)

(5)

(6) Web cam LED On: Camera is operating. Ambient light sensors (2) Antennas (2)**

Detect light levels in the environment to adjust the camera's noise reduction levels. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).

*The infrared camera and lenses are not visible from the outside of the computer.

**The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Keyboard area Keyboards can vary by language. NOTE: The keyboard, including the function keys and power key (select products only), is disabled in stand, tent, and tablet modes. To enable the keyboard, including the power key, change to the clamshell mode. Touchpad The touchpad settings and components are described here. Touchpad settings You learn how to adjust the touchpad settings and components here. Adjusting touchpad settings Use these steps to adjust touchpad settings and gestures. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type touchpad settings in the search box, and then press enter. 2. Choose a setting. Turning on the touchpad Follow these steps to turn on the touchpad. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type touchpad settings in the search box, and then press enter. 8 Chapter 2Components 2. Using an external mouse, click the Touchpad button. If you are not using an external mouse, press the Tab key repeatedly until the pointer rests on the touchpad button. Then press the spacebar to select the button. Touchpad components Use the illustration and table to identify the touchpad components. Table 2-5 Touchpad components and their descriptions Component Description Touchpad zone Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using touchpad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 24. Left touchpad zone Right touchpad zone Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse.

(1)

(2)

(3) Lights Use the illustration and table to identify the lights on the computer. Touchpad components 9

Table 2-6 Lights and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. Privacy key light (select products only) On: Privacy screen is on, which helps prevent side-angle viewing. Mute light Microphone mute light Camera privacy light Power light On: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Microphone is off. Off: Microphone is on. On: Camera is disabled. Off: Camera is enabled. On: The computer is on. Blinking (select products only): The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unnecessary components. Off: Depending on your computer model, the computer is off, in Hibernation, or in Sleep. Hibernation is the power-

saving state that uses the least amount of power.

(7) Fn lock light On: The fn key is locked. For more information, see Hot keys

(select products only) on page 15. 10 Chapter 2Components Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader Fingerprint readers can be located on the touchpad, on a side panel of the computer, or on the top cover below the keyboard. IMPORTANT: To verify that your computer supports fingerprint reader sign-in, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type Sign-in options in the search box, and then select the Sign-on options app. If Fingerprint recognition is not listed as an option, then your notebook does not include a fingerprint reader. Table 2-7 Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader and their descriptions Component

(1) Speakers Description Produce sound. Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader 11 Table 2-7 Power key, speakers, and fingerprint reader and their descriptions (continued) Component

(2) Power key

(3) Fingerprint reader (select products only) Description When the computer is off, press the key briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the key briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the key briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the key briefly to exit Hibernation. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power key results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power key for at least 4 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, use the Power icon. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Swipe down across the fingerprint reader. See Windows Hello

(select products only) on page 48 for details. IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, make sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader. Special keys Use the illustration and table to identify the special keys. 12 Chapter 2Components Table 2-8 Special keys and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with another key. Such key combinations are called hot keys. See Hot keys (select products only) on page 15. Windows key Opens the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. Power button See Action keys on page 13. When the computer is off, press the button briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, use the Power icon. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings.

(6) Camera privacy switch Turns the camera off and on. NOTE: or more information, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 28 Action keys Action keys perform specific functions and vary by computer. To determine which keys are on your computer, look at the icons on your keyboard and match them to the descriptions in this table. To use an action key, press and hold the key. NOTE: On some products, you must press the fn key in combination with the action key. Action keys 13 Table 2-9 Action keys and their descriptions Icon Description Switches the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing the key alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Helps prevent side-angle viewing from onlookers. If needed, decrease or increase brightness for well-lit or darker environments. Press the key again to turn off the privacy screen. NOTE: This feature is available only on select products. If the feature is not available on your computer, a message is displayed when you press this key. NOTE: To quickly turn on the highest privacy setting, press fn+p. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes the microphone. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. On select products, you can adjust the brightness of the keyboard backlight. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer), to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the touchpad (select products only). To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Press to switch between overtype mode and insert mode. Overtype mode: The cursor overwrites any existing text. Insert mode: The cursor inserts characters at its current position. 14 Chapter 2Components Table 2-9 Action keys and their descriptions (continued) Icon Description Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Executes frequently used tasks. Some tasks might not be available on all products. Opens an application, file, or website Enters frequently used text into a permanent clipboard Ability to change system profiles Ability to change system properties Executes user-defined key sequences NOTE: The action key feature is enabled at the factory. On select products only, you can disable this feature by pressing and holding the fn key and the left shift key. The fn lock light will turn on. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Hot keys (select products only) A hot key is the combination of the fn key and another key. Use the table to identify the hot keys. To use a hot key:

Press the fn key, and then press one of the keys listed in the following table. Table 2-10 Hot keys and their descriptions Key Description C E R S W Turns on scroll lock. Turns on the insert function. Breaks the operation. Sends a programing query. Pauses the operation. Bottom Use the illustration and table to identify the bottom components. Hot keys (select products only) 15 Table 2-11 Bottom components and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2) Speakers (2) Vent Description Produce sound. Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you might need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels might be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you might be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. 16 Chapter 2Components Table 2-12 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Serial number Product ID HP product name Table 2-13 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) HP product name Product ID Serial number Warranty period Table 2-14 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) HP product name Warranty period Product ID Labels 17 Table 2-14 Service label components (continued) Component

(4) Serial number Regulatory labelsProvide regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification labelsProvide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 18 Chapter 2Components 3 Network connections Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites by using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter helps you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer might be equipped with one or more wireless devices. WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select products only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations

(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 m (approximately 33 ft) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features. Wireless button (also called airplane mode key or wireless key) Operating system controls Wireless button The computer might have a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. Depending on your computer model, you have several methods to access operating system controls:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, and then select Control Panel. or On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Network and Internet settings. Network connections 19 Connecting to a WLAN Before you can connect to a WLAN with this procedure, you must first set up internet access. NOTE: When you are setting up internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an internet service provider (ISP). To purchase internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the internet service. 1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select the right arrow icon next to the Wi-Fi button to see the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you might be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE: Depending on your computer model, if you do not see the WLAN that you want to connect to, follow one of these methods:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Network and Internet settings. Select WiFi, and then select Manage known networks. Select the Add network button. A list of options is displayed, which allows you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI number, MEID number, or both to activate mobile broadband service. The number might be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. 1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon. Select Network and Internet settings. In the Network and Internet window, select Cellular, and then select Mobile operator settings. 20 Chapter 3Network connections Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it might be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information that is included with your computer or the mobile network operator might provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices. Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse External keyboard Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type bluetooth in the search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select Add device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device that you are adding, NOTE:

follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, see the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some NOTE:

devices might have additional requirements; see the documentation provided with the device. Connecting to a wired network Select products might allow a local area network (LAN) connection, which uses a network cable. The cable is sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) 21

Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly) or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

NOTE: A feature called HP LAN-Wireless Protection might be enabled on your computer. It closes your wireless (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection when you connect directly to a LAN. For more information about HP LAN-Wireless Protection, see Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) on page 22. If there is no RJ-45 port on the computer, connecting to a LAN requires a network cable and a network jack or an optional docking device or expansion product. 1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer or on an optional docking device or expansion product. 2. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) In a LAN environment, you can set HP LAN-Wireless Protection to safeguard your LAN network from unauthorized wireless access. When HP LAN-Wireless Protection is enabled, the WLAN (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection is turned off when the computer is connected directly to a LAN. To turn on and customize HP LAN-Wireless Protection:

1. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and before the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

22 Chapter 3Network connections 2. 3. 4. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Built-in Device Options. Select the check box for LAN/WLAN Auto Switching, LAN/WWAN Auto Switching, or both to turn off WLAN connections, WWAN connections, or both when connected to a LAN network. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using HP MAC Address Pass Through (select products only) MAC Address Pass Through provides a customizable way of identifying your computer and its communications on networks. This system MAC address provides unique identification even when your computer is connected through a network adapter. This address is enabled by default. To customize MAC Address Pass Through:

1. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Advanced, and then select MAC Address Pass Through. In the box to the right of Host Based MAC Address, select either System Address to enable MAC address Pass Through or Custom Address to customize the address. If you selected Custom, select MAC ADDRESS, enter your customized system MAC address, and then press enter to save the address. If the computer has an embedded LAN and you would like to use the embedded MAC address as the system MAC address, select Reuse Embedded LAN Address. or Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using HP MAC Address Pass Through (select products only) 23 4 Navigating the screen Depending on your computer model, you can navigate the computer screen using one or more methods. Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen. Use touch gestures on the touchpad. Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately). Use an on-screen keyboard. Use a pointing stick. Using touchpad and touch screen gestures The touchpad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right touchpad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Some products include a precision touchpad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if you have a precision touchpad and find additional information, follow these steps, depending on your computer:

Select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the touchpad and a touch screen. Tap Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the touchpad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. 24 Chapter 4Navigating the screen Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) Place two fingers slightly apart on the touchpad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) Tap two fingers on the touchpad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse. Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger tap opens the search box. Tap three fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) 25 To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop. Swipe three fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe three fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe three fingers left or right to switch between open windows. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops. Swipe four fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe four fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe four fingers left or right to switch between desktops. 26 Chapter 4Navigating the screen To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. One-finger slide (touch screen) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) These instructions help you learn to use the on-screen keyboard. You can display the on-screen keyboard in several ways:

1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type on-screen keyboard in the search box, and then select On-Screen Keyboard. or 2. Press the Windows key +ctrl+o. NOTE: Suggested words might be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. One-finger slide (touch screen) 27 5 Entertainment features Use your HP computer for business or pleasure to meet with others via the camera, mix audio and video, or connect external devices like a projector, monitor, TV, or speakers. See Components on page 3 to locate the audio, video and camera features on your computer. Using a camera (select products only) Your computer has one or more cameras that enable you to connect with others for work or play. Most cameras allow you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Cameras can be front facing or rear facing. To determine which camera or cameras are on your product, see Components on page 3. To use your camera, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type camera in the search box, and then select Camera. Some cameras also feature HD (high-definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Security on page 40 for details about using Windows Hello. You can enhance your computer privacy by covering the lens with the camera privacy cover. By default, the camera lens is uncovered, but you can slide the camera privacy cover to block the camera's view. To use the camera, slide the camera privacy cover in the opposite direction to reveal the lens. Using audio You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select products) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach headphones or speakers. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones You can connect wired headphones to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

28 Chapter 5Entertainment features Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting headsets You can connect a headset to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. A stand-alone microphone can be plugged into a USB port. See your manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. Viewing or changing sound settings Use these instructions to view or change sound settings. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, and then select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using the control panel to view and control audio settings You can view or change sound settings using the audio control panel. Your computer might include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, DTS, Beats audio, or another provider. As a result, your computer might include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, select Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. Connecting headsets 29 To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your video features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) Connect a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable. NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C DisplayPort device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external DisplayPort device, connect the DisplayPort device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort connector on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external DisplayPort device. Press f4 to cycle through four display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, increase the screen resolution of the NOTE:

external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. 30 Chapter 5Entertainment features Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport MultiStream Transport (MST) allows you to connect multiple wired display devices to your computer by connecting to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on your computer and also to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on a hub or an external docking station. You can connect in several ways, depending on the type of graphics controller installed on your computer and whether your computer includes a built-in hub. Go to Device Manager to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Connecting displays to computers with AMD or NVIDIA graphics (with an optional hub) To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps. NOTE: With an AMD graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to six external display devices. NOTE: With an NVIDIA graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to four external display devices. 1. 2. 3. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort (DP) connector on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. Connect your external display devices to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on the hub. To see all of your connected display devices, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type device manager in the search box, and then select the Device Manager app. If you don't see all of your connected displays, be sure that each is connected to the correct port on the hub. NOTE: Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which spans your computer screen across all enabled display devices. Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps. NOTE: With an Intel graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to three display devices. 1. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort connector on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. 2. Connect your external display devices to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on the hub. 3. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DisplayPort hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Select the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the NOTE:

correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps. Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport 31 With your internal hub and Intel graphics controller, you can connect up to three display devices in the following configurations:

Two 1920 1200 DisplayPort monitors connected to the computer and one 1920 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station One 2560 1600 DisplayPort monitor connected to the computer and one 1920 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station 1. Connect your external display devices to the VGA port or DisplayPort connectors on the computer base or the docking station. 2. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DisplayPort hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Select the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. NOTE:

If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) To connect devices to a USB Type-C port, follow these steps. NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 32 Chapter 5Entertainment features 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) 33 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state automatically initiates after a period of inactivity. Your work is available in memory, allowing you to resume your work quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. Depending on your computer model, the Sleep state might also support Modern Standby mode. This mode keeps some internal operations awake and enables your computer to receive web notifications, such as emails, while in Sleep. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 34. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 35. IMPORTANT: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in several ways. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1 or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button (select products only). You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). Tap the touchpad (select products only). 34 Chapter 6Managing power When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. IMPORTANT:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type power in the search box, and then select Choose a power plan. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording might vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. 4. Select Save changes. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. IMPORTANT:

Windows password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Shutting down (turning off) the computer The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. IMPORTANT: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly NOTE:

pressing the power button. 1. Save your work and close all open programs. Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) 35 2. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Using the Power icon The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To view power settings, right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings. Different power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When the computer has a charged battery and is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time might vary by 10%. When the remaining battery charge is between 0 and 50%, the battery charges to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. 36 Chapter 6Managing power Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) Follow these steps to access battery information. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. Select Fixes & Diagnostics, select Check your battery, and then select Launch. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

HP Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power Follow these steps to conserve battery power and maximize battery life. Lower the brightness of the display. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the computer warns you in one of several ways. The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon on page 36. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level You can quickly resolve low battery level conditions. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) 37 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power. AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the battery level is low and you cannot bring the computer out of Hibernation, connect the AC adapter. 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). 1. Select the Search icon on the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) on the taskbar. 2. Select Fixes & Diagnostics, select Check your battery, and then select Launch. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Running on external power For information about connecting to external power, see the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or updating system software When updating the system BIOS 38 Chapter 6Managing power When writing information to a disc (select products only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge. The Power icon changes appearance. When you disconnect external power:

The computer switches to battery power. The Power icon changes appearance. Running on external power 39 7 Security Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, Computer Setup

(BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and Computer Setup (BIOS, which runs under any operating system) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Some features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://www.hp.com. Table 7-1 Security solutions Computer risk Security feature Unauthorized use of the computer HP Client Security software, in combination with a password, smart card, contactless card, registered fingerprints, or other authentication credential BIOS power-on password Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (BIOS) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock password (select products only) in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized startup from an optional external optical drive

(select products only), optional external hard drive (select products only), or internal network adapter Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data Windows BitLocker Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable on select products only)

*Computer Setup is an embedded, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. You can use a pointing device (touchpad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use the touch screen. 40 Chapter 7Security Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. You can set several types of passwords, depending on how you want to control access to your information. You can set passwords in Windows or in Computer Setup, which is preinstalled on the computer. BIOS administrator, power-on, and DriveLock passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. If you forget both the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password set in Computer Setup, the hard drive that is protected by the passwords is permanently locked and can no longer be used. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. Use the Password Manager feature of HP Client Security to store your user names and passwords for your websites and applications. You can securely read them in the future if they cannot be remembered. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Setting passwords in Windows Windows passwords can help protect your computer from unauthorized access. Table 7-2 Types of Windows passwords and their functions Password Function Administrator password*

Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. User password*

Protects access to a Windows user account.

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: Setting the Windows administrator password does not set the BIOS administrator password. Setting passwords in Computer Setup Computer Setup passwords provide additional layers of security for your computer. Using passwords 41 Table 7-3 Types of Computer Setup passwords and their functions Password Function BIOS administrator password*

Protects access to Computer Setup. Power-on password DriveLock master password*

DriveLock user password*

NOTE:

If features have been enabled to prevent removing the BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled. Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. This password is also used to remove DriveLock protection. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process.

*For details about each of these passwords, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps. Setting a new BIOS administrator password A BIOS administrator password helps prevent unauthorized access to Computer Setup. Use these instructions to set a new BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. Select Security, select Create BIOS administrator password or Set Up BIOS administrator Password

(select products only), and then press enter. 3. When prompted, type a password. 4. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 5. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. 42 Chapter 7Security Changing a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to change a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password. 6. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to delete a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. Changing a BIOS administrator password 43 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same keys that you used to set the password), and then press enter. After two unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Using DriveLock Security Options DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drives of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, the appropriate password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer or an advanced port replicator for it to be unlocked. DriveLock Security Options offers the following features:

Automatic DriveLockSee Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) on page 44. Set DriveLock Master PasswordSee Selecting manual DriveLock on page 45. Enable DriveLockSee Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 46. Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) You must set a BIOS administrator password before you can enable Automatic DriveLock. When Automatic DriveLock is enabled, a random DriveLock user password and a DriveLock master password derived from the BIOS administrator password are created. When the computer is turned on, the random user password automatically unlocks the drive. If the drive is moved to another computer, you must enter the BIOS administrator password for the original computer at the DriveLock password prompt to unlock the drive. Enabling Automatic DriveLock To enable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. 44 Chapter 7Security 3. 4. 5. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to select the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Disabling Automatic DriveLock To disable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to clear the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering an Automatic DriveLock password While Automatic DriveLock is enabled and the drive remains attached to the original computer, you will not be prompted to enter a DriveLock password to unlock the drive. However, if the drive is moved to another computer, or the system board is replaced on the original computer, you will be prompted to provide the DriveLock password. If this happens, at the DriveLock Password prompt, type the BIOS administrator password for the original computer (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter to unlock the drive. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Selecting manual DriveLock To manually apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, you must set a master password, and DriveLock must be enabled in Computer Setup. Disabling Automatic DriveLock 45 IMPORTANT: To prevent a DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, you can access the hard drive only by entering either the DriveLock user password or the master password. The owner of the DriveLock user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the DriveLock master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password can be identical. Setting a DriveLock master password To set a DriveLock master password, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, make the selection for Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Set DriveLock Master Password, and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock master password. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. NOTE: You can enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password before exiting from Computer Setup. For more information, see Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 46. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password To enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password, follow these steps. 46 Chapter 7Security 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Enable DriveLock and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock user password and enable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Disabling DriveLock To disable DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

a. b. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. Select Disable DriveLock, and then press enter. Follow the on-screen instructions to disable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disabling DriveLock 47 Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your DriveLock user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Changing a DriveLock password To change a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn off the computer. Press the power button. At the DriveLock Password prompt, type the current DriveLock user password or master password that you are changing, press enter, and then press or tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. 6. Make the selection for the DriveLock password that you want to change, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enter passwords. NOTE: The Change DriveLock Master Password option is visible only if the DriveLock master password was provided at the DriveLock Password prompt in step 3. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, Windows Hello allows you to enroll your fingerprint and your facial ID, and set up a PIN. After enrollment, you can use your fingerprint reader, facial ID, or PIN to sign in to Windows. To set up Windows Hello:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. If you do not have a password set up, you must add one before you can use other sign-in options. Select Password, and then select Add. Under Facial recognition (Windows Hello) or Fingerprint recognition (Windows Hello), select Set up. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, be sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader. 48 Chapter 7Security NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access email, a network, or the internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage that they cause. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Windows Defender is preinstalled on your computer. HP strongly recommends that you continue to use an antivirus program to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, access the HP Support Assistant. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program that you install on your computer, network, or both, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized email attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. To view or change the settings:

IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. Using antivirus software 49 1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Windows Update. Follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Client Security (select products only) HP Client Security software is preinstalled on your computer. You can access this software through the HP Client Security icon at the far right of the taskbar or Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that help protect against unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. Using HP TechPulse (select products only) HP TechPulse is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP TechPulse helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost-effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hpdaas.com/. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select products. To use the fingerprint reader, you must enroll your fingerprints in HP Client Security's Credential Manager. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. After you enroll your fingerprints in Credential Manager, you can use HP Client Security's Password Manager to store and fill in your user names and passwords in supported websites and applications. The fingerprint reader is a small metallic sensor that is located in one of the following areas of your computer:

Near the bottom of the touchpad On the right side of the keyboard On the upper-right side of the display On the left side of the display On the back of the display Depending on your product, the reader may be oriented horizontally or vertically. 50 Chapter 7Security 8 Maintenance Performing regular maintenance keeps your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. Connect the computer to AC power. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type defragment in the search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type disk in the search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under some conditions. You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. Maintenance 51 NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay, the secondary hard drive bay (select products only), or both are parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers regularly. Updates can resolve issues and provide new features and options. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you do not get the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. To update your programs and drivers, follow these steps. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. 3. Under My notebook, select Updates. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Cleaning your computer regularly removes dirt and debris so that your device continues to operate at its best. Use the following information to safely clean the external surfaces of your computer. Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only) HP Easy Clean helps you to avoid accidental input while you clean the computer surfaces. This software disables devices such as the keyboard, touch screen, and touchpad for a preset amount of time so that you can clean all computer surfaces. 1. Start HP Easy Clean in one of the following ways:

Select the Start button, and then select HP Easy Clean. or Select the HP Easy Clean icon in the taskbar. or Select the Start button, and then select the HP Easy Clean tile. 2. Now that your device is disabled for a short period, see Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 53 for the recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer. After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning your 52 Chapter 8Maintenance computer with a disinfectant on page 53 for guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Removing dirt and debris from your computer Here are the recommended steps to clean dirt and debris from your computer. For computers with wood veneer, see Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 54. 1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. 2. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 53 for recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant The World Health Organization (WHO) recommends cleaning surfaces, followed by disinfection, as a best practice for preventing the spread of viral respiratory illnesses and harmful bacteria. After cleaning the external surfaces of your computer using the steps in Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 53, Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 54, or both, you might also choose to clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. A disinfectant that is within HPs cleaning guidelines is an alcohol solution consisting of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. This solution is also known as rubbing alcohol and is sold in most stores. Follow these steps when disinfecting high-touch, external surfaces on your computer:

1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. Removing dirt and debris from your computer 53 2. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with a mixture of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. CAUTION: Do not use any of the following chemicals or any solutions that contain them, including spray-based surface cleaners: bleach, peroxides (including hydrogen peroxide), acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, methylene chloride, or any petroleum-based materials, such as gasoline, paint thinner, benzene, or toluene. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. Caring for wood veneer (select products only) Your product might feature high-quality wood veneer. As with all natural wood products, proper care is important for best results over the life of the product. Because of the nature of natural wood, you might see unique variations in the grain pattern or subtle variations in color, which are normal. Clean the wood with a dry, static-free microfiber cloth or chamois. Avoid cleaning products containing substances such as ammonia, methylene chloride, acetone, turpentine, or other petroleum-based solvents. Do not expose the wood to sun or moisture for long periods of time. If the wood becomes wet, dry it by dabbing with an absorbent, lint-free cloth. Avoid contact with any substance that might dye or discolor the wood. Avoid contact with sharp objects or rough surfaces that might scratch the wood. See Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 53 for the recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer. After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 53 for sanitizing guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you must travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. 54 Chapter 8Maintenance Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. IMPORTANT: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you can use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices might be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions might apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to run the computer with a voltage converter kit that is sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 55 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering You can use Windows tools or HP software to back up your information, create a restore point, reset your computer, create recovery media, or restore your computer to its factory state. Performing these standard procedures can return your computer to a working state faster. IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before Backing up information and creating recovery media These methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select products only. Using Windows tools for backing up HP recommends that you back up your information immediately after initial setup. You can do this task either using Windows Backup locally with an external USB drive or using online tools. IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive. For details:

Go to http://www.hp.com, search for HP Cloud Recovery, and then select the result that matches the type of computer that you have. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 57 to restore your computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your machine to a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling all the operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process. Restoring and recovering your system You have several tools available to recover your system both within and outside of Windows if the desktop cannot load. 56 Chapter 9Backing up, restoring, and recovering HP recommends that you attempt to restore your system using the Restoring and recovery methods on page 57. Creating a system restore System Restore is available in Windows. The System Restore software can automatically or manually create restore points, or snapshots, of the system files and settings on the computer at a particular point. When you use System Restore, it returns your computer to its state at the time you made the restore point. Your personal files and documents should not be affected. Restoring and recovery methods After you run the first method, test to see whether the issue still exists before you proceed to the next method, which might now be unnecessary. 1. 2. Run a Microsoft System Restore. Run Reset this PC. NOTE: The options Remove everything and then Fully clean the drive can take several hours to complete and leave no information on your computer. It is the safest way to reset your computer before you recycle it. 3. Recover using HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery media on page 57. For more information about the first two methods, see the Get Help app:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select the Get Help app, and then enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the internet to access the Get Help app. Recovering using HP Recovery media You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. On select products, it can be created on a bootable USB flash drive using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool. For details, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 56. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To recover your system:

Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. NOTE: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 57 to restore your computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your machine to a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling all the operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process. Creating a system restore 57 Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart using the HP Recovery media, you can change the computer boot order, the order of devices listed in BIOS for startup information. You can select an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before To change the boot order:

1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. For computers or tablets with keyboards attached, turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards, turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume up button, and then select f9. or Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Sure Recover (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Recover, a PC operating system (OS) recovery solution built into the hardware and software. HP Sure Recover can fully restore the HP OS image without installed recovery software. Using HP Sure Recover, an administrator or user can restore the system and install:

Latest version of the operating system Platform-specific device drivers Software applications, in the case of a custom image To access the latest documentation for HP Sure Recover, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Follow the on-screen instructions to find your product and locate your documentation. 58 Chapter 9Backing up, restoring, and recovering 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start HP provides several tools to help set up and protect your computer. Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as hard drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. To start Computer Setup, turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup You can navigate and select in Computer Setup using one or more methods. To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps. NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start 59 1. 2. Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 59. Select Main, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. NOTE: On select products, the selections might display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS might be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. If you are already in Windows, you can access BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) by pressing fn+esc (select products only). Or you can use Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 59. Select Main, and then select System Information. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To check for later BIOS versions, see Preparing for a BIOS update on page 60. Preparing for a BIOS update Be sure to follow all prerequisites before downloading and installing a BIOS update. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 60 Chapter 10Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start Downloading a BIOS update After you review the prerequisites, you can check for and download BIOS updates. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

2. 3. 4. a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You might need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. Installing a BIOS update BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type file in the search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps. 1. Access the Boot Device Options menu:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. 2. Select a boot device, press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading a BIOS update 61 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup

(BIOS). IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation or usage of TPM that violates the previously mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will not be responsible for any related liabilities. NOTE:

If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system. To access TPM settings in Computer Setup:

1. 2. Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 59. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Sure Start (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that monitors the computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. Advanced users can customize the default configuration. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 62 Chapter 10Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics You can use the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics utility to determine whether your computer hardware is running properly. The three versions are HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI

(Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), and (for select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, a firmware feature. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 64. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit failure ID code is generated for select component tests. For interactive tests, such as keyboard, mouse, or audio and video palette, you must perform troubleshooting steps before you can receive a failure ID. You have several options after you receive a failure ID:

Select Next to open the Event Automation Service (EAS) page, where you can log the case. or Scan the QR code with your mobile device, which takes you to the EAS page, where you can log the case. or Select the box next to the 24-digit failure ID to copy your failure code and send it to support. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, you can access it from HP Support Assistant or the Start menu. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support (select products only) After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 3. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 63 NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Support Assistant. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. 3. Select Fixes & Diagnostics. Select Run Hardware diagnostics, and then select Launch. 4. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only) After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from the Start menu. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select All apps. Select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 3. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows downloading instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP, follow these steps. 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics Windows, and then select the specific Windows diagnostics version to download to your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool downloads to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. 64 Chapter 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the Diagnostics section, select Download, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select the specific Windows diagnostics version to be downloaded to your computer or USB flash drive. The tool downloads to the selected location. Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store You can download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store. 1. Select the Microsoft Store app on your desktop. or Select the Search icon in the taskbar, and then type Microsoft Store in the search box. Enter HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows in the Microsoft Store search box. Follow the on-screen directions. 2. 3. The tool downloads to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. For some products, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create NOTE:

the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 66. If your PC does not start in Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit failure ID code is generated. For assistance in solving the problem:

Select Contact HP, accept the HP privacy disclaimer, and then use a mobile device to scan the failure ID code that appears on the next screen. The HP Customer Support - Service Center page appears with your failure ID and product number automatically filled in. Follow the on-screen instructions. or Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store 65 Contact support, and provide the failure ID code. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow this procedure. 1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 66. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in some situations. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstallation image. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive, follow this procedure. 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. 66 Chapter 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it might upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information about Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a SoftPaq that you can download to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version You can download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive. 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number You can download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software by using the product name or NOTE:

number. 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform several customizations. Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a hard drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) 67 Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password that you use for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. 68 Chapter 11Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 12 Specifications When you travel with or store your computer, the input power ratings and operating specifications provide helpful information. Input power The power information in this section might be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100 V240 V, 50 Hz60 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within one or more of the following specifications. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Specifications 69 Table 12-1 DC power specifications Input Power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /

15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Operating environment Use the operating specifications for helpful information when you travel with or store your computer. Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C Nonoperating 20C to 60C Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) 41F to 95F 4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

70 Chapter 12Specifications Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications (continued) Factor Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 15 m to 3,048 m 15 m to 12,192 m 50 ft to 10,000 ft 50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 71 13 Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 72 Chapter 13Electrostatic discharge 14 Accessibility HP's goal is to design, produce, and market products, services, and information that everyone everywhere can use, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate third-party assistive technology (AT) devices or applications. HP and accessibility Because HP works to weave diversity, inclusion, and work/life into the fabric of the company, it is reflected in everything HP does. HP strives to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 74. The HP commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports the company's diversity objectives and helps ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. The HP accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve that goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide HP actions. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within HP, and provide employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features, and make information about HP products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that improves assistive technology relevant to HP products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. Accessibility 73 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. As a founding member, HP joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports HPs accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that people with disabilities can effectively use. IAAP will make the profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You can choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, can also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products These links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable and available in your country or region, that are included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and products most appropriate for your situation. HP Aging & Accessibility: Go to http://www.hp.com, type Accessibility in the search box. Select Office of Aging and Accessibility. HP computers: For Windows products, go to http://www.hp.com/support, type Windows Accessibility Options in the Search our knowledge search box. Select the appropriate operating system in the results. HP Shopping, peripherals for HP products: Go to http://store.hp.com, select Shop, and then select Monitors or Accessories. If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 77. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

74 Chapter 14Accessibility Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows and Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) Standards and legislation Countries worldwide are enacting regulations to improve access to products and services for persons with disabilities. These regulations are historically applicable to telecommunications products and services, PCs and printers with certain communications and video playback features, their associated user documentation, and their customer support. Standards The US Access Board created Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-

based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multimedia, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The European Union created the EN 301 549 standard within Mandate 376 as an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. These links provide information about key legislation, regulations, and standards. Standards and legislation 75 United States Canada Europe Australia Useful accessibility resources and links These organizations, institutions, and resources might be good sources of information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you encounter on the internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations These organizations are a few of the many that provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions Many educational institutions, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-

related limitations. California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources Many resources, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program 76 Chapter 14Accessibility ILO Global Business and Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable HP links These HP-specific links provide information that relates to disabilities and age-related limitations. HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales Contacting support HP offers technical support and assistance with accessibility options for customers with disabilities. NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. HP links 77 Index A accessibility 73-75, 77 accessibility needs assessment 74 action keys 13 identifying 13 keyboard backlight 14 mute 14 privacy screen 14 screen brightness 14 speaker volume 14 switch screen image 14 using 13 wireless 15 administrator password 41 airplane mode key 19 ambient light sensor 7, 8 identifying 7, 8 antivirus software 49 assistive technology (AT) finding 74 purpose 73 AT (assistive technology) finding 74 purpose 73 audio 28 adjusting volume 14 headphones 28 headsets 29 sound settings 29 speakers 28 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack, identifying 5 Automatic Drivelock selecting 44 Automatic DriveLock disabling 45 enabling 44 Automatic DriveLock password entering 45 B backup, creating 56 backups 56 battery conserving power 37 discharging 37 78 Index factory-sealed 38 finding information 37 low battery levels 37 resolving low battery level 37, 38 battery charge 36 battery information, finding 37 battery light 5 battery power 36 BIOS determining version 60 downloading an update 60, 61 updating 60 Bluetooth device 19, 21 Bluetooth label 16 boot order changing using the f9 prompt 61 boot order, changing 58 buttons camera 13 left Touchpad 9 power 12, 13 right Touchpad 9 C camera 6-8 identifying 6-8 using 28 camera disable button, identifying 13 camera privacy cover using 28 camera privacy light, identifying 10 caps lock light, identifying 10 caring for your computer 52 cleaning your computer 52 caring for wood veneer 54 disinfecting 53 HP Easy Clean 52 removing dirt and debris 53 components bottom 15 display 5, 6 keyboard area 8 left side 4 right side 3 Computer Setup BIOS administrator password 42-44 navigating and selecting 59 restoring factory settings 59 starting 59 connecting to a WLAN 20 connector, power 5 corporate WLAN connection 20 critical battery level 37 customer support, accessibility 77 D data transfer 32 Disk Cleanup software 51 Disk Defragmenter software 51 display components 5, 6 DriveLock description 45 disabling 47 enabling 46 DriveLock master password changing 48 DriveLock password changing 48 entering 48 setting 46 DriveLock Security Options 44 E electrostatic discharge 72 esc key, identifying 13 external power, using 38 F factory-sealed battery 38 fingerprint reader 50 fingerprint reader, identifying 12 fingerprints, registering 48 firewall software 49 fn key, identifying 13 fn lock light, identifying 10 four-finger swipe touchpad gesture 26 four-finger tap touchpad gesture 26 G gesture 26 H hardware, locating 3 headphones, connecting 28 headsets, connecting 29 Hibernation exiting 35 initiated during critical battery level 37 initiating 35 hot keys break 15 insert 15 microphone mute 14 pause 15 programming query 15 scroll lock 15 using 15 HP 3D DriveGuard 51 HP Assistive Policy 73 HP Client Security 50 HP Fast Charge 36 HP LAN-Wireless Protection 22 HP MAC Address Pass Through 23 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading 66 failure ID code 65 starting 66 using 65 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows accessing 63, 64 downloading 64, 65 failure ID code 63 installing 65 using 63 HP Recovery media recovery 57 HP resources 1 HP Sure Recover 58 HP TechPulse 50 I infrared LEDs, identifying 6, 7 initiating Sleep and Hibernation 34 input power 69 International Association of Accessibility Professionals 74 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo 5 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 27 operating environment 70 K P keyboard and optional mouse passwords using 27 keyboard backlight action key 14 keys action 13 esc 13 fn 13 Windows 13 L labels Bluetooth 16 regulatory 16 serial number 16 service 16 wireless certification 16 WLAN 16 left side components 4 lights AC adapter and battery 5 battery 5 camera privacy 10 caps lock 10 fn lock 10 microphone mute 10 power 10 privacy key 10 lights, mute 10 low battery level 37 low blue light mode 6 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 51 Disk Defragmenter 51 updating programs and drivers 52 managing power 34 memory card reader, identifying 4 microphone mute key, identifying 14 microphone mute light, identifying 10 mute light, identifying 10 mute volume action key 14 administrator 41 BIOS administrator 42-44 user 41 ports USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge 4 USB Type-C 32 USB Type-C DisplayPort 4 USB Type-C power connector 4 USB Type-C power connector and Thunderbolt port with HP Sleep and Charge 5 USB Type-C SuperSpeed 4 USB Type-C SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort 30 power battery 36 external 38 power button, identifying 13 power connector identifying 4, 5 identifying USB Type-C 5 power icon, using 36 power key, identifying 12 power lights 10 power settings, using 36 precision touchpad using 24 precision touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 26 four-finger tap 26 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 25 two-finger tap 25 privacy key light 10 privacy screen action key, identifying 14 product name and number, computer 16 public WLAN connection 20 R recovery 56 discs 57 media 57 Index 79 USB flash drive 57 recovery media 56 standards and legislation, accessibility 75 creating using HP Cloud Recovery SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort Download Tool 56 creating using Windows tools 56 regulatory information connector, connecting USB Type-

C 30 Sure Start using 62 regulatory label 16 wireless certification labels 16 Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics switch screen image action key 14 system restore 57 system restore point, creating 56 UEFI settings customizing 67 using 67 resources, accessibility 76 restoring 56 restoring and recovery methods 57 right side components 3 S screen brightness action keys 14 Section 508 accessibility standards 75 security cable 50 security cable slot, identifying 4 serial number, computer 16 service labels, locating 16 setup utility navigating and selecting 59 restoring factory settings 59 shipping the computer 54 shutdown 35 Sleep exiting 34 initiating 34 Sleep and Hibernation, initiating 34 slots security cable 4 software antivirus 49 Disk Cleanup 51 Disk Defragmenter 51 firewall 49 software installed, locating 3 software updates, installing 49 sound See audio sound settings, using 29 speaker volume action keys 14 speakers connecting 28 speakers, identifying 11 special keys, using 12 80 Index T tap touchpad and touch screen gesture 24 three-finger swipe touchpad gesture 26 three-finger tap touchpad gesture 25 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 27 touchpad settings 8 using 24 touchpad and touch screen gestures tap 24 two-finger pinch zoom 24 Touchpad buttons identifying 9 touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 26 four-finger tap 26 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 25 two-finger tap 25 Touchpad zone, identifying 9 TPM settings 62 transfer data 32 traveling with the computer 16, 54 turning off the computer 35 two-finger pinch zoom touchpad and touch screen gesture 24 two-finger slide touchpad gesture 25 two-finger tap touchpad gesture 25 U unresponsive system 35 updating programs and drivers 52 USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 4 USB Type-C port, connecting 30, 32 USB Type-C power connector and Thunderbolt port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 5 USB Type-C power connector port, identifying 4 USB Type-C SuperSpeed port, identifying 4 user password 41 using passwords 41 using the keyboard and optional mouse 27 using the touchpad 24 V vents, identifying 16 video 29 DisplayPort device 30 USB Type-C 30 volume adjusting 14 mute 14 W web cam LEDs, identifying 6, 8 Windows backup 56 recovery media 56 system restore point 56 Windows Hello using 48 Windows key, identifying 13 Windows tools, using 56 wireless action key 15 wireless button 19 wireless certification label 16 wireless controls button 19 operating system 19 wireless key 19 wireless light 19 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 20 corporate WLAN connection 20 functional range 20 public WLAN connection 20 WLAN device 16 WLAN label 16 WWAN device 19, 20

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. Legal information Copyright 2022 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. WiGig is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: July 2022 Document Part Number: N25728-001 About this guide This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. WARNING!

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION:

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates information considered important but not hazard-related (for example, messages IMPORTANT:

related to property damage). Warns the user that failure to follow a procedure exactly as described could result in loss of data or in damage to hardware or software. Also contains essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task. NOTE: Contains additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. TIP: Provides helpful hints for completing a task. iii Table of contents 1Regulatory notices .................................................................................................................................................................1 Accessing regulatory labels...............................................................................................................................................1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................................................1 Modifications .............................................................................................................................................................2 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................................2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ...................................................................2 Wireless devices with 5.925 GHz7.125 GHz............................................................................................................3 Belarus regulatory notice ..................................................................................................................................................3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................................................3 Canada notices...................................................................................................................................................................3 European Union and UK regulatory notices ......................................................................................................................4 Declaration of Conformity .........................................................................................................................................4 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ...........................................................................................................4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) .......................................................4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only).............................5 Ergonomics notice .............................................................................................................................................5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax)..................................................................................5 Australia and New Zealand notice .....................................................................................................................................6 China WWAN notice............................................................................................................................................................6 China radio equipment notice............................................................................................................................................6 Japan notice .......................................................................................................................................................................6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ......................................................................6 Mexico notice .....................................................................................................................................................................7 Eurasian Union regulatory notices ....................................................................................................................................7

....................................................................................................................7

........................................................................................................................7

: ................................................................................................................................8

:.....................................................................................................................................8 Singapore wireless notice..................................................................................................................................................8 South Korea notices...........................................................................................................................................................9 Regulatory submission document ............................................................................................................................9 Thailand wireless notice ....................................................................................................................................................9 Taiwan NCC notices ............................................................................................................................................................9 LAN 802.11 //:...............................................................................................9 Airline travel notice..........................................................................................................................................................10 User-replaceable battery notices....................................................................................................................................10 Factory-sealed battery notices .......................................................................................................................................10 iv Laser compliance.............................................................................................................................................................10 Telecommunications device approvals ...........................................................................................................................11 Modem notices.................................................................................................................................................................11 U.S. modem statements..........................................................................................................................................11 Canada modem statements ....................................................................................................................................12 Japan modem statements.......................................................................................................................................12 New Zealand modem statements ...........................................................................................................................13 Voice support...................................................................................................................................................13 Macrovision Corporation notice.......................................................................................................................................13 2Safety notices ......................................................................................................................................................................14 Important safety information .........................................................................................................................................14 Heat-related safety warning notice ................................................................................................................................15 Potential safety conditions notice ..................................................................................................................................15 Installation conditions.....................................................................................................................................................15 Acoustics notice ...............................................................................................................................................................15 Battery notices.................................................................................................................................................................16 Fan notices .......................................................................................................................................................................16 Headset and earphone volume level notice....................................................................................................................17 Laser safety .....................................................................................................................................................................17 Power supply and power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................17 Power supply class I grounding requirements........................................................................................................17 Brazil notice .....................................................................................................................................................18 Denmark ..........................................................................................................................................................18 Finland .............................................................................................................................................................18 Norway.............................................................................................................................................................18 Sweden ............................................................................................................................................................18 Power supply requirements ....................................................................................................................................18 China ................................................................................................................................................................18 For use in Norway ............................................................................................................................................18 Power cord set requirements ..................................................................................................................................18 Power cord notice ....................................................................................................................................................19 DC plug of external HP power supply..............................................................................................................19 Japan power cord notice..........................................................................................................................................19 Japan power cord requirements..............................................................................................................................19 Pinch hazard ....................................................................................................................................................................20 TV antenna connectors protection..................................................................................................................................20 External television antenna grounding...................................................................................................................20 Lightning protection ................................................................................................................................................20 Note to CATV system installer .................................................................................................................................21 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................................................21 China safety notices.........................................................................................................................................................22 China altitude notice................................................................................................................................................22 China tropical warning notice..................................................................................................................................22 v Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................................23 Taiwan eyesight notice ....................................................................................................................................................23

.............................................................................................................................................23 3Environmental notices.........................................................................................................................................................24 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling...................................................................................................24 Disposal of waste equipment by users ...........................................................................................................................24 Brazil alkaline battery disposal.......................................................................................................................................24 Brazil hardware recycling information............................................................................................................................24 France Triman WEEE and recycling label ........................................................................................................................25 Taiwan battery recycling information .............................................................................................................................25 Turkey WEEE regulation ..................................................................................................................................................25 ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ........................................................................................................25 Chemical substances .......................................................................................................................................................27 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply .........................................................................................................27 China environmental notices...........................................................................................................................................27 China PC energy label ......................................................................................................................................................27 China RoHS.......................................................................................................................................................................31

.........................................................................31

.....................32

(RoHS) .................................................................34

.............................................................................................................................34

(RoHS) .....................................................................................................................................................................35

.............................................................................................................................35 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ..........................................................................................................36 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 ..........................................................................36 IT ECO declarations ..........................................................................................................................................................37 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................................................37 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico .............................................................................37 TCO Certified ....................................................................................................................................................................37 TCO Certified Edge............................................................................................................................................................38 Index ........................................................................................................................................................................................40 vi 1 Regulatory notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select products only), under the removable service door (select products only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Regulatory notices 1 These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. 2 Chapter 1Regulatory notices Wireless devices with 5.925 GHz7.125 GHz FCC regulations restrict the operation of this device to indoor use only. The operation of this device is prohibited on oil platforms, cars, trains, boats, and aircraft, except that operation of this device is permitted in aircraft while flying above 10,000 feet. The operation of this device is also prohibited for control of or communications with unmanned aircraft systems. Belarus regulatory notice The product complies with the Belarus National Radio/Telecom Technical Regulation TR 2018/024/BY. Brazil notice Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. IMPORTANT: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230V. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115V, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Para maiores informaes, consulte o site da ANATEL www.anatel.gov.br. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. IMPORTANT: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25 GHz to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 GHz to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Wireless devices with 5.925 GHz7.125 GHz 3 European Union and UK regulatory notices The European Union and UK have their own set of regulatory notices. Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking and UK marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and UK and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives and the equivalent UK Statutory Instruments as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full EU and UK Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website:

http://www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters: Email techregshelp@hp.com. Products with radio functionality (EMF) Use this notice when you need to provide EMF data for radio operation. This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) Some products in some countries have restrictions on radio function. IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.15 GHz5.35 GHz and/or Wi-Fi 6E Low Power Indoor 5.945 IMPORTANT:

GHz6.425 GHz (or 5.925 GHz6.425 GHz in UK) frequency bands are restricted for indoor use only in all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. 4 Chapter 1Regulatory notices Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) The table shows radio frequency bands and maximum power levels for some products and some countries. Table 1-1 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2.4 GHz NFC; 13.56 MHz RFID; 865868 MHz/915921 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2.4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11ax; 6 GHz WWAN 5G NR (450 MHz7125 MHz) WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2300/2600/3500 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) 100 10 2000/4000 100 200 EU: 200/25 (LPI/VLP) UK: 250/25 (LPI/VLP) 400 200 250 2000 1000 316 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. Ergonomics notice When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use for VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sunlight) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-mouse and monitor. Please pay attention when installing a dedicated Tower, Micro Tower Business Desktop PC or Workstation that is not intended to be installed/used in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid annoying reflections at visual display workplaces, this device must not be placed in the direct field of view. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) 5 regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. China WWAN notice China radio equipment notice Japan notice V-2 B VCCI-B VCCI32-1 B VCCI-B 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. 6 Chapter 1Regulatory notices Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Aviso sobre conexiones inalmbricas para Mxico:

En el caso de PC de escritorio, equipos All-in-One, terminales de punto de venta, thin clients y workstations en uso normal e instalados con un dispositivo de transmisin y recepcin de radio, una distancia de separacin de 20 cm garantiza que los niveles de exposicin a radiofrecuencia cumplan con los requisitos de Mxico. Eurasian Union regulatory notices The following notices might apply to products sold in the Eurasian Union. HP Inc.

: 1501 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, California 94304, U.S. 10- ,

. 4-, 5- 6- . 4- , , 3

, 2013 . 5- 6- , , 12 12-

. HP Inc.

: 1501 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, California 94304, U.S. 10

. Mexico notice 7 4-, 5- 6- . 4-

, 3 2013 . 5- 6- , , 12 12- .

, 125171, . , , 16, .3,

/: +7 495 797 35 00 / +7 499 92132 50

: " ..", , 050040, .

, , -, 77/7,

/: +7 727 355 35 52

, 125171, , , 16A 3,

/: +7 495 797 35 00 / +7 499 92132 50

, 050040, ., , -

., 77/7,

/: +7 727 355 35 52 Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. 8 Chapter 1Regulatory notices South Korea notices Regulatory submission document Thailand wireless notice

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. Taiwan NCC notices The following notices apply to Taiwan. LAN 802.11 //:

South Korea notices 9 Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance Use this notice to warn of possible radiation exposure from incorrect laser usage. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. 10 Chapter 1Regulatory notices Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Modem notices Canada, Japan, New Zealand, and the U.S. have their own sets of modem notices. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. Telecommunications device approvals 11 If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

12 Chapter 1Regulatory notices New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all ofTelecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, ofcorrect operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is noguarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noiseand may also cause a false answer condition. Should suchproblems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be setto operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing(So set between 2and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it isbeing recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with inrespect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, howit is to be used, and what is disclosed to any otherparty. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. New Zealand modem statements 13 2 Safety notices Your product documentation might require one or more of these safety notices. Important safety information These notices could apply to many products. WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. If the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug, always use the power cord with a properly grounded AC outlet to avoid the risk of electric shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. 14 Chapter 2Safety notices Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. IMPORTANT:

system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to applicable safety standards). Heat-related safety warning notice Use this notice if injury from excessive heat is a possibility. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the mobile computer, do not place the mobile computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the mobile computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The mobile computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of heat-related injuries, do not touch internal hot surfaces until internal surfaces have cooled down to room temperature. Potential safety conditions notice Use this notice to warn users about the possibility that a failure was not safe and controlled. If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Acoustics notice Use this notice when the sound pressure level might be lower than recommended or expected. Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779). To display product noise emission data, go to IT ECO Declarations at http://www.hp.com/go/ted, and then select a product category from the drop-down menu. Heat-related safety warning notice 15 Battery notices One or more of these safety notices might apply to your product's battery. WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. WARNING!

from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away WARNING!

immediate medical attention. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Table 2-1 Battery disposal icon and description Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Fan notices Use one or more of these notices to warn users about the dangers of injuries from spinning fan blades. WARNING!

Keep body parts away from moving parts. 16 Chapter 2Safety notices WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice This notice warns about the danger of high volume settings for headsets and earphones. WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Different countries have different requirements for power supplies and power cords. Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. Headset and earphone volume level notice 17 Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Denmark Finland Norway Sweden Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. China CCC For use in Norway Some products are designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230 V. Power cord set requirements One or more of these notices might apply to your product's power cord. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized 18 Chapter 2Safety notices replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/support. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirement listed below is applicable to all countries:

The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer orfor an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. DC plug of external HP power supply The diagram illustrates the DC plug of external HP power supply. Japan power cord notice Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Power cord notice 19 Pinch hazard Use this notice to warn about the possibility of pinching injuries. WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection Several safety notices might apply to TV antenna connectors. External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 2-2 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) 20 Chapter 2Safety notices Table 2-2 Antenna Grounding (continued) Reference Grounding Component 6 7 Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. Travel notice Use this notice to warn about the possibility of serious injury from voltage converter kits. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to theequipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Note to CATV system installer 21 China safety notices China altitude notice 2000m 2000m China tropical warning notice 22 Chapter 2Safety notices Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner Norway and Sweden require a galvanic isolator for grounding. CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan eyesight notice This eyesight notice applies to products in Taiwan.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner 23 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Use this notice to explain the icon associated with waste disposal. Table 3-1 Disposal of waste equipment icon and its description Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Brazil hardware recycling information No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum 24 Chapter 3Environmental notices Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar France Triman WEEE and recycling label Use this notice to explain the icon associated with recycling. Taiwan battery recycling information This notice provides the regulations for battery manufacture and recycling in Taiwan. Table 3-2 Taiwan battery recycling icon and its description Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Turkey WEEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

France Triman WEEE and recycling label 25 A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use.Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity.The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Table 3-3 Preset power management features when the computer is operating on AC power Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. 26 Chapter 3Environmental notices Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices China PC energy label China requires this notice of energy efficiency. Chemical substances 27 In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Table 3-4 Typical Energy Consumption (TEC) values Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Portable Computer Category B 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa Category C 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Category D 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa Category A Category B Category C 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Table 3-5 Product category and configuration description Product Type Configuration Description Category A Category B Category C Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. 28 Chapter 3Environmental notices Table 3-5 Product category and configuration description (continued) Product Type Category D Configuration Description CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. GB28380-2012 China PC energy label 29 30 Chapter 3Environmental notices China RoHS China uses the following notices for RoHS. Table 3-6

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE)

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China RoHS 31 Table 3-6 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE)

/Java USB USB X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS O O O O O O O O Table 3-7

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE)

X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 32 Chapter 3Environmental notices Table 3-7 (continued) I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB 3D /

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 33 Table 3-7 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Table 3-8 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Cables

Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply 34 Chapter 3Environmental notices Table 3-8 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking (continued) Storage Devices Wireless Devices Restricted substances and its chemical symbols 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals.

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Table 3-9 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel (for AIO only) Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium

(Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE)

(RoHS) 35 Table 3-9 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking (continued) Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium

(Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016."

It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 The European Union requires this notice about power consumption. To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, 36 Chapter 3Environmental notices refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. IT ECO declarations Use these links to provide locations for IT ECO declarations. Notebook or tablet PCs http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/iteconotebook-o.html Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 1 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950/

A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a las estaciones de trabajo. TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. See https://tcocertified.com/product-finder/ to see a list of TCO Certified products. IT ECO declarations 37 TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. 38 Chapter 3Environmental notices See https://tcocertified.com/product-finder/ to see a list of TCO Certified Edge products. TCO Certified Edge 39 Index A airline travel notice 10 altitude notice 22 Aviso para o Brasil 3 avisos Brasil 3 B battery 16 battery notice 10, 24 battery recycling 24 Belarus regulatory notice 3 Brazil notice 3, 18 C cable grounding notice 23 Canada modem statement 12 Canada notices 3 China environmental notices 27 China PC energy label 27 D disposal notices battery 24 battery, user replacement 10 equipment 24 factory sealed battery 10 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 24 ENERGY STAR certification 25 environmental notices 24 equipment disposal notice 24 ergonomics notice 5 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 36 F fan notice 16 Federal Communications Commission notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 notebook computers notice 1 40 Index G GS Notice 5 H equipment disposal 24 ergonomics 5 fan 16 headset and earphone volume level 17 headset and earphone volume level India restriction of hazardous notice 17 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 36 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 19 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 37 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 10, 17 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 maximum power levels 5 Mexico wireless notice 7 modem notices 11 modem statements Canada 12 Japan 12 New Zealand 13 U.S. 11 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 13 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 16, 24 Belarus regulatory 3 Brazil 3, 18 Canada 3 environmental 24 substances 36 Japan 6 Japan power cord 19 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 37 laser safety 10, 17 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 7 modem 11 perchlorate material 27 power cords 19 Singapore 8 South Korea 9 Taiwan 9 Thailand wireless notice 9 travel 21 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 1 P power cord notice 19 R radio frequency bands 5 recycling, electronic hardware and battery 24 regulatory submission document, South Korea 9 S Singapore wireless notice 8 South Korea notice 9 South Korea regulatory submission document 9 T Taiwan notice 9 TCO Certified Certification 37 TCO Certified Edge Certification 38 Thailand wireless notice 9 travel notice 21 tropical warning notice 22 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 23 U U.S. modem statement 11 V voice support 13 volume level notice, headset and earphone 17 W wireless devices 3 wireless LAN devices 2 Symbols/Numerics 34, 35 34, 35 Index 41

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6551012.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case FM350-GL Hardware Guide _General Version: V1.0.5 Date: 2020-03-12 Applicability Table No. Product model Description 1 FM350-GL-00 NA Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 2 of 59 Copyright Copyright 2020 Fibocom Wireless Inc. All rights reserved. Without the prior written permission of the copyright holder, any company or individual is prohibited to excerpt, copy any part of or the entire document, or distribute the document in any form. Notice The document is subject to update from time to time owing to the product version upgrade or other reasons. Unless otherwise specified, the document only serves as the user guide. All the statements, information and suggestions contained in the document do not constitute any explicit or implicit guarantee. Trademark The trademark is registered and owned by Fibocom Wireless Inc. Change History Version Author Date Remark V1.0.5 Randy 2021-03-12 Update LTE UL to Release 15 V1.0.4 Xiaodequan 2021-02-06 Update Phase2 feature V1.0.3 Leidaijun 2020-11-11 Update Power Sequence V1.0.2 Xiaodequan 2020-09-15 V1.0.1 Leidaijun 2020-6-30 Update n25, n30 Update PCIe impedance requirement Update pin definition Update FCPO# and RESET# recommended design Update WWAN M.2 module type configuration V1.0.0 Leidaijun 2020-4-30 Draft version Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 3 of 59 Contents 1 Foreword ....................................................................................................................... 7 1.1 1.2 1.3 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 7 Reference Standard ..................................................................................................... 7 Related Documents ...................................................................................................... 8 2 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 8 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 8 Specification ................................................................................................................. 8 Application Block ........................................................................................................ 10 Hardware Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 11 Antenna Configuration ................................................................................................ 11 3 Application Interface ...................................................................................................13 3.1 M.2 Interface .............................................................................................................. 13 Pin Map ......................................................................................................................... 13 Pin Definition ................................................................................................................. 14 3.2 Power Supply ............................................................................................................. 18 Power Supply ................................................................................................................ 18 Logic level ..................................................................................................................... 19 3.3 Control Signal ............................................................................................................. 20 Module Start-Up ............................................................................................................ 20 3.3.1.1 Start-up Circuit ........................................................................................................................... 20 3.3.1.2 Start-up Timing Sequence ......................................................................................................... 21 Module Shutdown ......................................................................................................... 22 Module Reset ................................................................................................................ 22 PCIe Link State ............................................................................................................. 24 3.3.4.1 D0 L1.2 ...................................................................................................................................... 24 3.3.4.2 D3cold L2..................................................................................................................................... 25 Timing application ......................................................................................................... 26 3.4 PCIe Interface ............................................................................................................ 26 PCIe Interface Definition ............................................................................................... 27 PCIe Interface Application ............................................................................................. 27 3.5 USIM Interface............................................................................................................ 29 USIM Pins ..................................................................................................................... 29 USIM Interface Circuit ................................................................................................... 30 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 4 of 59 3.5.2.1 N.C. SIM Card Slot .................................................................................................................... 30 3.5.2.2 N.O. SIM Card Slot .................................................................................................................... 30 USIM Hot-Plug .............................................................................................................. 31 USIM Design ................................................................................................................. 31 3.6 Status Indicator........................................................................................................... 32 LED#1 Signal ................................................................................................................ 32 WOWWAN# .................................................................................................................. 33 3.7 Interrupt Control .......................................................................................................... 34 W_DISABLE1# .............................................................................................................. 34 BODYSAR ..................................................................................................................... 34 3.8 3.9 ANT Tunable Interface ................................................................................................ 34 Configuration Interface ............................................................................................... 35 4 Radio Frequency .........................................................................................................36 4.1 RF Interface ................................................................................................................ 36 RF Interface Functionality ............................................................................................. 36 RF Connector Characteristic ......................................................................................... 36 RF Connector Dimension .............................................................................................. 37 RF Connector Assembly ............................................................................................... 38 4.2 4.3 4.4 Operating Band .......................................................................................................... 39 Transmitting Power ..................................................................................................... 41 Antenna Design .......................................................................................................... 43 5 ESD Characteristics ....................................................................................................46 6 Structure Specification ...............................................................................................47 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 Product Appearance ................................................................................................... 47 Dimension of Structure ............................................................................................... 47 M.2 Interface Model .................................................................................................... 48 M.2 Connector ............................................................................................................ 49 Storage ....................................................................................................................... 50 Storage Life ................................................................................................................... 50 6.6 Packing ...................................................................................................................... 50 Tray Package ................................................................................................................ 50 Tray size ........................................................................................................................ 52 7 CE Conformance information .....................................................................................53 8 FCC Conformance information ..................................................................................53 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 5 of 59 9 ISED Conformance information .................................................................................57 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 6 of 59 1 Foreword 1.1 Introduction The document describes the electrical characteristics, RF performance, dimensions and application environment, etc. of FM350-GL (hereinafter referred to as FM350). With the assistance of the document and other instructions, the developers can quickly understand the hardware functions of FM350 modules and develop products. 1.2 Reference Standard The design of the product complies with the following standards:

3GPP TS 38.300 V15.5.0 : 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; NR; NR and NG-RAN Overall Description; Stage 2 3GPP TS 38.521-1 V15.2.0 : User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission and reception; Part 1: Range 1 Standalone 3GPP TS 38.521-3 V15.2.0 :User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission and reception; Part 3: Range 1 and Range 2 Interworking operation with other radios 3GPP TS 34.121-1 V8.11.0: User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission and reception (FDD);Part 1: Conformance specification 3GPP TS 34.122 V14.0.0: Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Radio transmission and reception (TDD) 3GPP TS 36.521-1 V14.0.0: User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission and reception; Part 1: Conformance testing 3GPP TS 21.111 V10.0.0: USIM and IC card requirements 3GPP TS 51.011 V4.15.0: Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module -Mobile Equipment (SIM-

ME) interface 3GPP TS 31.102 V10.11.0: Characteristics of the Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) application 3GPP TS 31.11 V10.16.0: Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) Application Toolkit(USAT) 3GPP TS 36.124 V10.3.0: Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements for mobile terminals and ancillary equipment 3GPP TS 27.007 V10.0.8: AT command set for User Equipment (UE) 3GPP TS 27.005 V10.0.1: Use of Data Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit terminating Equipment

(DTE - DCE) interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS) PCI Express M.2 Specification Rev1.2 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 7 of 59 1.3 Related Documents FIBOCOM Design Guide_RF Antenna 2 Overview 2.1 Introduction FM350 is a highly integrated 5G Sub-6 WWAN module which uses M.2 form factor interface. It supports NR/LTE /WCDMA systems and can be applied to most cellular networks of mobile carrier in the world. 2.2 Specification Specification LTE FDD: B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B12, B13, B14, B17, B18, B19, B20, B25, B26, B28, B29, B30, B32, B66, B71 Operating Band LTE TDD: B34, B38, B39, B40, B41, B42, B43, B46, B48 NR: n1, n2, n3, n5, n7, n8, n20, n25, n28, n30, n38, n40, n41, n481), n66, n71, n77, n78, n79 WCDMA/HSPA+: Band 1, 2, 4, 5, 8 GNSS Support GPS, GLONASS, Galileo, BDS, QZSS NR LTE 3GPP Release 15 3GPP Release 15 UMTS 3GPP Release 8 NR:

DL 4*4 MIMOn1, n2, n3, n7, n25, n30, n38, n40, n41, n48, n66, n77, n78, n79 UL 2*2 MIMOn41, n77, n78, n79 LTE:

DL 4*4 MIMOB1, B2, B3, B4, B7, B25, B30, B34, B38, B39, B40, B41, B42, B43, B48, B66 Feature NSA and SA supported SRS: n41, n77, n78, n79, Support: 1T2R, 1T4R, 2T4R HPUE: B41, n41, n772), n78, n79 TX Switching WCDMA: B1, B2, B4 LTE: B1, B2, B3, B4, B7, B25, B30, B34, B38, B39, B40, B41, B42, B43, B48, B66 NR: n1, n2, n3, n7, n25, n30, n38, n40, n41,n48, n66, n77, n78, n79 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 8 of 59 Specification SA 5G/NR Sub-6 Peak DL 4.67Gbps/ UL 1.25Gbps3) NSA Peak DL 3.74Gbps/ UL 835Mbps4) Data Transmission LTE DL 1.6Gbps (CAT19)/ UL 211Mbps(CAT18) 5) UMTS/HSPA+

DL UMTS:384 kbps/ UL 384 kbps DL DC-HSPA+:42 Mbps (CAT24)/ UL 11.5 Mbps (CAT7) Carrier Aggregation LTE DL 5CA, UL 2CA NR DL 2CA, UL 2CA ENDC DL LTE 5CA+ NR 1CA, LTE 3CA+ NR 2CA , UL LTE 2CA+ NR 1CA Power Supply DC 3.135V4.4V, Typical 3.3V Normal operating temperature: -10C +55C Extended operating temperature: -30C +75C Storage temperature: -40C+85C Interface: M.2 Key-B Dimension30 x 52 x 2.3mm Weight: 8g Temperature Physical Characteristics Interface Antenna Connector WWAN Antenna x 4 Support 4x4 MIMO Dual SIM (one built-in eSIM), 1.8V/3V PCIe Gen3 X1 USB 2.0 (For debug) USB 3.1 Gen1 (Reserved) Function Interface W_Disable#

BodySAR LED Tunable antenna I2C (Reserved) UART (Reserved) Software Protocol Stack IPV4/IPV6 AT Commands 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005 Firmware Update PCIe Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 9 of 59 Specification Other Feature Multiple carrier Windows update 1) Disabled for FCC cannot certify currently, will enable in future after FCC can certify 2) n77 support HPUE, target power is 25+1/-1dBm 3) NR UL 2.5Gbps is under investigating for future 4) NSA DL 4.45Gbps is under investigating for future 5) LTE UL 225Mbps(CAT20) is under investigating for future Note:

When temperature goes beyond normal operating temperature range of -10C~+55C, RF performance of module may be slightly off 3GPP specifications. 2.3 Application Block The peripheral applications for FM350 module are shown in Figure 2-1:

Figure2-1 Application Block Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 10 of 59 ModuleSIM1USB2.0/USB3.0Power SupplyON/OFF# RESET#ControlEINTIndicatorHost applicationANT3(D/G)ANT0(M)SIM CardPCIeANT2(M2)ANT1(M1)eSIM 2.4 Hardware Block Diagram The hardware block diagram in Figure 2-2 shows the main hardware functions of FM350 module, including base band and RF functions. Baseband contains the followings: RF contains the followings:

5G NR/LTE/UMTS controller PMU MCP (NAND+LPDDR4 RAM) Application interface RF Transceiver RF ET Power/PA RF PAMid/Front end RF SW RF Multi-plexer/Filter Figure 2-2 Hardware block diagram 2.5 Antenna Configuration FM350 module supports four antennas and the configuration is as below table:

Antenna Connector Function Description Band configuration ANT0(Main) ANT1(M1) ANT2(M2) ANT3(D/G) Main antenna port for TRX and SRS Antenna port for RX and SRS Antenna port for TRX and SRS Diversity & GNSS ANT and SRS All supported bands transmit &

receive and SRS 4x4 MIMO supported bands receive and SRS Transmit, 4x4 MIMO receive and SRS All supported bands and GNSS receive, SRS Frequency Rang

(MHz) 617~5925 1805~5000 1452~5000 617~5925 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 11 of 59

+3.3VFUL_CARD_POWER_OFF#RESET#PCIeUSB2.0USB 3.0USIM1EINTWOWWAN#LEDI2CUARTANT_TUNER_1V8MIPI_RFFETunable ANTBaseband(NR/LTE FDD/LTE TDD/UMTS controller)PMUPA ET0DCDCDRXRF PartM.2 Key-B 75pin interfaceANT3(D/G)ANT0(M)GNSS LNARF TransceiverTCXOTriplexerTriplexerMB/HB PAMiDTXA0PRXDPDTLBPAMiDANT2(M2)ANT1(M1)DRX2PRX2GNSS SAWGNSS ReceiverDRFMCP(NAND+LPDDR4)MIPI RFFEIQeSIMDiplexerDiplexerUHB Main PAMidUHB Comp PAMidUHB/XB DRX(4x4 MIMO)SAW/LNAUHB/XB DRX(4x4 MIMO)SAW/LNAPA ET1DCDCTXA1Multi-plexerSPDTN41 PADPDTDPDTSP3TSPDTM/HB FEM(4x4 MIMO)GNSSExtractorSPDT Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 12 of 59 3 Application Interface 3.1 M.2 Interface The FM350 module applies standard M.2 Key-B interface, with a total of 75 pins. Pin Map Figure 3-1 Pin Map Note:

Pin Notch represents the gap of the gold fingers. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 13 of 59 Pin Definition The pin definition is as below table:

Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description Level 7 USB D+

I/O

USB data plus 8 W_DISABLE1#

I WWAN disable, active low 1 CONFIG_3 O NC 2 +3.3V 3 GND 4 +3.3V 5 GND 6 FULL_CARD_ POWER_OFF#

PI

PI

I

PU I/O OD

9 USB D-

10 LED1#

11 GND 12 Notch 13 Notch 14 Notch 15 Notch 16 Notch 17 Notch 18 Notch 19 Notch 20 GPIO I/O 21 CONFIG_0 O NC 22 UART_TX 23 WOWWAN#

O O 24 ANT_TUNER_1V8 O

NC, FM350 M.2 module is configured as the WWAN PCIe Gen3, USB3.1 Gen1 interface type

Power input GND Power input GND Power enable, module power on input, internal pull up(350K) Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply 3.3/1.8V 0.3---3V 3.3/1.8V 0.3---3V USB data minus System status LED, output open drain, 3.3V 3.3V GND Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch GPIO. Reserved Power Supply 1.8V GND, FM350 M.2 module is configured as the WWAN PCIe Gen3, USB3.1 Gen1 interface type

UART TXD output, can mux as ANT_TUNER_CFG or GPIO. Reserved Wake up host, Reserved 1.8V power output for antenna tuner, can mux as GPIO. 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 14 of 59 Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description Level 25 DPR 26 W_DISABLE2#

27 GND 28 UART_RX 29 USB3.0_TX-

30 UIM_RESET 31 USB3.0_TX+

32 UIM_CLK 33 GND I I

I O O O O

34 UIM_DATA I/O 35 USB3.0_RX-

36 UIM_PWR 37 USB3.0_RX+

38 NC 39 GND 40 I2C_SCL 41 PETn0 42 I2C_SDA 43 PETp0 44 I2C_IRQ#

45 GND 46 NC 47 PERn0 48 NC 49 PERp0 50 PERST#

I O I

O O I/O O I

I

I I Reserved Dynamic power reduction - Body SAR control signal (SAR_BACK_OFF) 3.3/1.8V GNSS disable, active low, Reserved 3.3/1.8V GND Power Supply UART RXD input, can mux as DPR2 or GPIO. Reserved 1.8V USB3.0 transmit data minus, reserved

SIM reset signal 1.8V/3V USB3.0 transmit data plus, reserved

SIM clock Signal GND 1.8V/3V Power Supply SIM data input/output 1.8V/3V USB3.0 receive data minus, reserved

SIM power supply, 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V USB3.0 receive data plus, reserved NC GND I2C master clock PCIe TX differential signals negative I2C master data

Power Supply 1.8V

1.8V PCIe TX differential signals positive

I2C interrupt request 1.8V GND

PCIe RX differential signals negative

PCIe RX differential signals positive Power Supply

PU Asserted to reset module PCIe interface default. If module went into core dump, it will reset whole module, not only PCIe 3.3/1.8V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 15 of 59 Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description Level interface. Active low, internal pull up(10K) 51 GND

GND Power Supply 52 CLKREQ#

I/O

Asserted by device to request a PCIe reference clock be available (active clock state) in order to transmit data. It also used by L1 PM Sub states mechanism, asserted by either host or device to initiate an L1 exit. Active low, open drain output and should add external pull up on platform 3.3/1.8V 53 REFCLKN I

PCIe reference clock signal Negative

54 PEWAKE#

O PD 55 REFCLKP 56 RFFE_SCLK 57 GND I O 58 RFFE_SDATA I/O 59 ANTCTL0 O

60 COEX3 I/O

Asserted to wake up system and reactivate PCIe link from L2 to L0, it depends on system whether supports wake up functionality. Active low, open drain output and should add external pull up on platform PCIe reference clock signal Positive MIPI interface tunable ANT, RFFE clock 3.3/1.8V

1.8V GND Power Supply MIPI interface tunable ANT, RFFE data Tunable ANT CTRL0 Wireless coexistence between WWAN and WiFi/BT modules, based on BT-SIG coexistence protocol. COEX_EXT_FTA, Reserved 61 ANTCTL1 O

Tunable ANT CTRL1 62 COEX_RXD I 63 ANTCTL2 64 COEX_TXD O O

Wireless coexistence between WWAN and WiFi/BT modules, based on BT-SIG coexistence protocol. UART receive signal(WWAN module side), Reserved Tunable ANT CTRL2 Wireless coexistence between WWAN and WiFi/BT modules, based on BT-SIG coexistence protocol. UART transmit signal(WWAN module side), Reserved 65 ANTCTL3 O

Tunable ANT CTRL3 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 16 of 59 Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description 66 SIM1_DETECT 67 RESET#

68 NC I I

PU

69 CONFIG_1 O GND SIM1 detect, internal pull up(390K), active high WWAN reset input, active low, internal pull up(350K) NC GND, FM350 M.2 module is configured as the WWAN PCIe Gen3, USB3.1 Gen1 interface type 70 +3.3V 71 GND 72 +3.3V PI

PI

Power input GND Power input Level 1.8V 1.8V

Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply 73 VIO_CFG

NC Configuration of PCIe sideband signals power domain NC: support 1.8V/3.3V;

GND: support 3.3V

74 +3.3V PI

Power input Power Supply 75 CONFIG_2 O NC GND, FM350 M.2 module is configured as the WWAN PCIe Gen3, USB3.1 Gen1 interface type

Reset Value: The initial status after module reset, not the status when working. H: High Voltage Level L: Low Voltage Level PD: Pull-Down PU: Pull-Up T: Tristate OD: Open Drain PI: Power Input PO: Power Output Note:

Digital IO pins cannot be connected to power directly. The unused pins can be left floating. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 17 of 59 3.2 Power Supply The power interface of FM350 module as shown in the following table:

Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Description DC Parameter (V) Minimum Value Typical Value Maximum Value 2, 4, 70, 72, 74 +3.3V PI Power supply input 3.135 3.3 4.4 36 UIM_PWR PO USIM power supply

1.8V/3V

The Power rating table is as below table:

Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Description Current Consumption Limit Max Avg(mA) 2, 4, 70, 72, 74 +3.3V PI Power supply input 3500 36 UIM_PWR PO USIM power supply 200 FM350 module uses PCIe interface, according to the PCIe specification, the PCIe Vmain should be used as the +3.3V power source, not the Vaux. The Vaux is the PCIe backup power source and it is not sufficient as the power supply. In addition, the DC/DC power supply other than PCIe ports should not be used as the external power cannot control the module status through the PCIe protocol. Power Supply The FM350 module should be powered through the +3.3V pins, and the power supply design is shown in Figure 3-2:

The filter capacitor design for power supply as shown in the following table:

Figure 3-2 Power supply design Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 18 of 59 Recommended capacitance Application Description 220uF x 2 Voltage-stabilizing capacitors 1uF, 100nF Digital signal noise 39pF, 33pF 18pF, 10pF, 8.2pF, 6.8pF, 3.9pF 700/800, 850/900 MHz frequency band 1500/1800, 2100/2300, 2600MHz, 3500/3600/3700MHz, 5GHz Reduce power fluctuations of the module in operation, requiring capacitors with low ESR. LDO or DC/DC power supply requires the capacitor of no less than 440uF The capacitor for battery power supply can be reduced to 100~200uF Filter out the interference generated from the clock and digital signals Filter out low frequency band RF interference Filter out medium/high frequency band RF interference The stable power supply can ensure the normal operation of FM350 module; and the ripple of the power supply should be less than 300mV in design. Module supports 5G NR Sub-6 download, when module operates with the maximum data transfer throughput, the peak current can reach to upper 3500mA. It requests the power source voltage should not be lower than 3.135V, otherwise module may shut down or restart. The power supply requirement is shown in Figure 3-3:

Figure 3-3 Power supply requirement Logic level The FM350 module 1.8V logic level definition as shown in the following table:

Parameters Minimum Typical Maximum Unit 1.8V logic level VIH VIL 1.71 1.3

-0.3 1.8 1.8 0 1.89 1.89 0.3 V V V The FM350 module 3.3V logic level definition as shown in the following table:

Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 19 of 59 Burst transmitBurst transmitmin:3.135VPower supplyRipple300mVDrop VBAT3.135V Parameters Minimum Typical Maximum Unit 3.3V logic level VIH VIL 3.135 2.3

-0.3 3.3 3.3 0 3.465 3.465 0.3 V V V 3.3 Control Signal The FM350 module provides two control signals for power on/off and reset operations, the pin defined as shown in the following table:

Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Functions Level 6 FULL_CARD_POWER _OFF#

67 RESET#

50 PERST#

Note I I I PU PU PU Module power on/off input, internal pull up(350K) Power on: High/Floating Power off: Low 3.3/1.8V WWAN reset input, active low, internal pull up(350K) 1.8V Asserted to reset module PCIe interface default. If module went into core dump, it will reset whole module, not only PCIe interface. Active low, internal pull up(10K) 3.3/1.8V RESET# and PERST# need to be controlled by independent GPIO, and not shared with other devices on the host. Module Start-Up 3.3.1.1 Start-up Circuit The FCPO#( FULL_CARD_POWER_OFF #) pin needs an external 3.3V or 1.8V pull up for booting up. AP (Application Processor) controls the module start-up. The recommended design is using a default PD port to control FCPO#. It also should reserve a 100K pull down resistor on AP side. The circuit design is shown in Figure 3-4:

Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 20 of 59 3.3.1.2 Start-up Timing Sequence Figure 3-4 Circuit for module start-up controlled by AP When power supply is ready, the PMU of module will power on and start initialization process by pulling high FCPO# signal. After about 20s, module will complete initialization process. The start-up timing is shown in Figure 3-5:

Index Min. Recommended Max. Comments Figure 3-5 Timing control for start-up tpr ton1 ton2 0ms

20ms 20ms 50ms 100ms

The delay time of power supply rising from 0V up to 3.3V.If power supply always ready, it can be ignored RESET# should be de-asserted after FCPO#

The time delay of PERST# de-asserted after FCPO#, PERST# must always be the last to get de-asserted The minimum detection time of PCIe link is about 23ms after PERST# de-asserted. Note When USB is used as data transfer interface, follow timing above in PERST# connecting with host, otherwise dont control PERST# in PERST# floating condition. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 21 of 59

+3.3VPERST#tprRESET#ton1Module StateInitializationActivation(AT Command Ready)FCPO#ton2typical 20sOFF Module Shutdown Module can be shut down by following control:

Shutdown Control Action Condition Software Sending AT+CFUN=0 command Normal shutdown(recommend) Hardware Pull down FCPO# pin Only used when a hardware exception occurs and the software control cannot be used. Module can be shut down by sending AT+CFUN=0 command. When the module receives the software shutdown command, the module will start the finalization process (the reverse process of initialization), and it will be completed after tsd time (tsd is the time which AP receive OK of AT+CFUN=0, if there is no response, the max tsd is 5s). In the finalization process, the module will save the network, SIM card and some other parameters from memory, then clear the memory and shut down PMU. The software control timing is shown in Figure 3-6:

Index Min. Recommended Max. Comments Figure 3-6 Software control power off timing toff1 toff2 16ms 20ms 2ms 10ms tpd 10ms 100ms

RESET# should be asserted after PERST#

FCPO# should be asserted after RESET#

+3.3V power supply goes down time. If power supply is always on, it can be ignored Module Reset The FM350 module can reset to its initial status by pulling down the RESET# signal for more than 2ms

(10ms is recommended), and module will restart after RESET# signal is released. When customer executes RESET# function, the PMU remains its power inside the module. The recommended circuit design is shown in the Figure 3-7:

Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 22 of 59

+3.3VPERST#tpdRESET#Module StateFinalizationActivationFCPO#toff1tsdOFFAT+CFUN=0toff2 Figure 3-7 Recommended design for reset circuit There are two reset control timings as below:

Reset timing 1st in Figure 3-8, PMU of module internal always on in reset sequence, recommend using in FW upgrade and module recovery;

Reset timing 2nd in Figure 3-9, PMU of module internal will be off in reset sequence (including whole power off and power on sequence, tsd can refer section 3.3.2), recommend using in system warm boot. Figure 3-8 Reset control timing1st Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 23 of 59 Figure 3-9 Reset control timing2nd

+3.3VPERST#RESET#Module StateInitializationActivationFCPO#typical 20sBaseband resetActivationtoff2+3.3VPERST#RESET#Module StateInitializationActivationFCPO#typical 20sActivationtoffFinalizationOFFAT+CFUN=0toff2toff1ton1ton2tsd Index Min. Recommended Max. Comments toff1 16ms 20ms toff2 2ms 10ms toff 500ms 500ms ton1 20ms 20ms ton2 50ms 100ms

RESET# should be asserted after PERST#, refer section 3.3.2 FCPO# should be asserted after RESET#, refer section 3.3.2 Time to allow the WWAN module to fully discharge any residual voltages before the pin could be de-asserted again. This is required for both Pre-OS as well as Runtime flow RESET# should be de-asserted after FCPO#, refer section 3.3.1.2 The time delay of PERST# de-asserted after FCPO#, PERST# must always be the last to get de-asserted, refer section 3.3.1.2 PCIe Link State Modem has the lowest power consumption in D0 L1.2 PCIe link state, D3cold L2 will increase extra about power consumption. CLKREQ# can assert or de-assert in D3cold L2, but CLKREQ#

shouldnt be changed again during D3cold L2. When CLKREQ# asserts in D3cold L2, it will increase extra power consumption compared with CLKREQ# de-asserted in D3cold L2, we recommend keep CLKREQ# de-asserted in D3cold L2. PCIe Link State PERST# CLKREQ#

D0 L1.2 D3cold L2 H L L H H L 3.3.4.1 D0 L1.2 Power Consumption

(mA) Isleep Isleep Isleep Description Refer 3.2.3 Power Consumption The extra is consumed on PERST# pull down The extra is consumed on CLKREQ# pull down Module supports PCIe goes into D0 L1.2 state in Win10 OS. The D0 L0@S0/S0ix D0 L1.2@S0/S0ixD0 L0@S0/S0ix timing is shown in figure 3-10:

Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 24 of 59 Figure 3-10 D0 L1.2 timing 3.3.4.2 D3cold L2 Module supports PCIe goes into D3cold L2 state in Win10 system. In D3cold L2 state, PCIe link can be wakeup by both modem and host. The D0 L0@S0/S0ixD3cold L2@S0/S0ixD0 L0@S0/S0ix timing is shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12:

Figure 3-11 D3cold L2 timing (Host wakeup) Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 25 of 59

+3.3VPERST#RESET#Module StateD0 L1.2@S0/S0ixD0 L0@S0/S0ixFCPO#D0 L0@S0/S0ixCLKREQ#+3.3VPERST#RESET#Module StateD3cold L2@S0/S0ixD0 L0@S0/S0ixFCPO#D0 L0@S0/S0ixPEWAKE#Host assertHost de-assertCLKREQ#Figure 3-12 D3cold L2 timing (Modem wakeup) Timing application The recommended timing application in Win10 OS is as below table:

System status Timing Application S0ix

(Modem standby) S3, S4, S5 D0 L1.2 Refer to section 3.3.4.1 Figure 3-10 D0 L1.2 Timing D3cold L2 Refer to section 3.3.4.2 Figure 3-11/3-12 D3cold L2 timing Power on

(back to S0) Power off

(out of S0) Refer to section 3.3.1.2 Figure 3-5 Timing control for start-up Refer to section 3.3.2 Figure 3-6 Software power off timing G3 boot Power on Refer to section 3.3.1.2 Figure 3-5 Timing control for start-up Warm boot Refer to section 3.3.3 Figure 3-9 Reset timing 2nd Modem FW upgrade / Modem recovery Refer to section 3.3.3 Figure 3-8 Reset timing 1st 3.4 PCIe Interface FM350 module supports PCIe as IPC interface for data transfer. The PCIe supports Gen3, one lane for Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 26 of 59

+3.3VPERST#RESET#Module StateD3cold L2@S0/S0ixD0 L0@S0/S0ixFCPO#D0 L0@S0/S0ixPEWAKE#Modem assertHost de-assertModem de-assertHost assertCLKREQ#

data transmission channel, it is also compatible with PCIe Gen2 and Gen1. BIOS configuration must follow X86 platform BKC (Best Know Configuration) reference design. PCIe interface initialized with host driver, then mapped MBIM & GNSS port in Win10 OS and RMNET &

AT port in Chrome/Linux/Android OS. The MBIM and RMNET interfaces are used for data transfer, GNSS port is used for receiving GNSS data, AT port is used for AT command. PCIe Interface Definition PCIe interface is defined as below table:

Pin# Pin Name I/O Reset Value Description Level 41 43 47 49 PETn0 PETP0 PERn0 PERP0 53 REFCLKN 55 REFCLKP 50 PERST#

O O I I I I I

PU 52 CLKREQ#

I/O 54 PEWAKE# O PD PCIe TX Differential signals, negative PCIe TX Differential signals, positive PCIe RX Differential signals, negative PCIe RX Differential signals, positive PCIe Reference Clock signal Negative PCIe Reference Clock signal Positive

Asserted to reset module PCIe interface default. If module went into coredump, it will reset whole module, not only PCIe interface. Active low, internal pull up(10K) Asserted by device to request a PCIe reference clock be available (active clock state) in order to transmit data. It also used by L1 PM Sub states mechanism, asserted by either host or device to initiate an L1 exit. Active low, open drain output and should add external pull up on platform Asserted to wake up system and reactivate PCIe link from L2 to L0, it depends on system whether supports wake up functionality. Active low, open drain output and should add external pull up on platform 3.3/1.8V 3.3/1.8V 3.3/1.8V PCIe Interface Application The reference circuit is shown in Figure 3-13:

Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 27 of 59 Figure 3-13 Reference Circuit for PCIe Interface FM350 module supports PCIe Gen3/one lane, including three difference pairs: transmit pair TXP/N, receiving pair RXP/N and clock pair CLKP/N. PCIe can achieve the maximum transmission rate of 8 GT/s, and must strictly follow the rules below in PCB Layout:

The differential signal pair lines shall be parallel and equal in length;

The differential signal pair lines shall be short if possible and be controlled within 7 inch(177.8 mm) for AP end;

The impedance of differential pair lines are recommended to be 85. All the impedance of differential pair should meet PCIe Gen3 protocol requirement of 70100. ;

It shall avoid the discontinuous reference ground, such as segment and space;

When the differential signal lines go through different layers, the via hole of grounding signal should be in close to that of signal, and generally, each pair of signals require 1-3 grounding signal via holes and the lines shall never cross the segment of plane;

Try to avoid bended lines and avoid introducing common-mode noise in the system, which will influence the signal integrity and EMI of difference pair. As shown in Figure 3-14, the bending angle of all lines should be equal or greater than 135, the spacing between difference pair lines should be larger than 20mil, and the line caused by bending should be greater than 1.5 times line width at least. When a serpentine line is used for length match with another line, the bended length of each segment shall be at least 3 times the line width ( 3W). The largest spacing between the bended part of the serpentine line and another one of the differential lines must be less than 2 times the spacing of normal differential lines (S1 < 2S);

Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 28 of 59 Module sideAP sideAC CapsAC CapsPERST#CLKREQ#WAKE#PERST#(pin50)CLKREQ#(pin52)PEWAKE#(pin54)PERn0PERP0PETn0PETP0REFCLKNREFCLKPPETn0(pin41)PETP0(pin43)PERn0(pin47)PERP0(pin49)REFCLKN(pin53)REFCLKP(pin55)+3.3V/1.8V100K10KM.2 Key-B 75pinConnector Figure 3-14 Requirement of PCIe line The difference in length of two data lines in difference pair should be within 5mil, and the length match is required for all parts. When the length match is conducted for the differential lines, the designed position of correct match should be close to that of incorrect match, as shown in Figure 3-15. However, there is no specific requirements for the length match of transmit pair and receiving pair, which means the length match is only required by intra differential pair rather than inter differential pair. Figure 3-15 Length match design of PCIe difference pair 3.5 USIM Interface The FM350 module supports dual SIM, one is a built-in eSIM and another is a SIM card interface. The SIM interface supports 1.8V and 3V SIM cards. USIM Pins The USIM1 pins description as shown in the following table:

Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Description 36 UIM_PWR 30 UIM_RESET 32 UIM_CLK 34 UIM_DATA PO

O O PD PD I/O PD USIM power supply USIM reset USIM clock Level 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V USIM data, internal pull up(4.7K) 1.8V/3V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 29 of 59 PCIe Difference Pair 1WSS1<2S3W13520milPCIe Difference Pair 21.5WCorrect matchDismatched endIncorrect matchMatched end Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Description Level 66 SIM_DETECT I PD Active high, and high level indicates 1.8V USIM card detect, internal 390K pull-

up. SIM card is inserted; and low level indicates SIM card is detached. USIM Interface Circuit 3.5.2.1 N.C. SIM Card Slot The reference circuit design for N.C. (Normally Closed) SIM card slot is shown in Figure 3-16:

The principles of the N.C.SIM card slot are described as follows:

Figure 3-16 Reference circuit for N.C. SIM card slot When the SIM card is detached, it connects the short circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin low. When the SIM card is inserted, it connects an open circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin high. 3.5.2.2 N.O. SIM Card Slot The reference circuit design for N.O. (Normally Open) SIM card slot is shown in Figure 3-17:

Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 30 of 59 The principles of the N.O.SIM card slot are described as follows:

Figure 3-17 Reference circuit for N.O. SIM card slot When the SIM card is detached, it connects an open circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin low. When the SIM card is inserted, it connects the short circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin high. USIM Hot-Plug The FM350 module supports the SIM card hot-plugging function, which determines whether the SIM card is inserted or detached by detecting the SIM_DETECT pin state of the SIM card slot. The SIM card hot-plugging function can be configured by AT+MSMPD command, and the description for AT command as shown in the following table:

AT Command Hot-plugging Detection Function Description AT+MSMPD=1 Enable AT+MSMPD=0 Disable Note:

Default value, the SIM card hot-plugging detection function is enabled. The module can detect whether the SIM card is inserted or not through the SIM_DETECT pin state. The SIM card hot-plugging detect function is disabled. The module reads the SIM card when starting up, and the SIM_DETECT status will not be detected. SIM_DETECT is active high, it can be swapped to active low by AT CMD. USIM Design The SIM card circuit design should meet the EMC standards and ESD requirements with the improved capability to resist interference, to ensure that the SIM card can work stably. The following guidelines Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 31 of 59 should be noted in design:

The SIM card slot should be placed as close as possible to the module, and away from the RF antenna, DC/DC power supply, clock signal lines, and other strong interference sources. The SIM card slot with a metal shielding housing can improve the anti-interference ability. The trace length between the SIM card slot and the module should not exceed 100mm, or it could reduce the signal quality. The UIM_CLK and UIM_DATA signal lines should be isolated by GND to avoid crosstalk interference. If it is difficult for the layout, the whole SIM signal lines should be wrapped with GND as a group at least. The filter capacitors and ESD devices for SIM card signals should be placed near to the SIM card slot, and the ESD devices with 22~33pF capacitance should be used. 3.6 Status Indicator The FM350 module provides two signals to indicate the operating status of the module, and the status indicator pins as shown in the following table:

Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description 10 LED1#

23 WOWWAN#

O O T System status LED, drain output. Wake up host, Reserved Level 3.3V 1.8V LED#1 Signal The LED#1 signal is used to indicate the operating status of the module, and the detailed description as shown in the following table:

Module Status LED1# Signal RF function ON Low level (LED On) RF function OFF High level (LED Off) The LED driving circuit is shown in figure 3-18:

Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 32 of 59 Note:

Figure 3-18 LED driving circuit The resistance of LED current-limiting resistor is selected according to the driving voltage and the driving current. WOWWAN#

The WOWWAN# signal is used to wake the Host (AP) when there comes the data request. The definition of WOWWAN# signal is as follows:

Operating Mode WOWWAN# Signal SMS or data requests Pull low 1s then pull high (pulse signal). Idle/Sleep High level The WOWWAN# timing is shown in Figure 3-19:

Figure 3-19 WOWWAN# timing Note:

WOWWAN# is disabled in default, it can be enabled by AT CMD: AT+GTSMSFILTERWUPEN=1 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 33 of 59 WOWWAN#1SIdle/SleepCall/SMS/DataIdle/SleepStatus 3.7 Interrupt Control The FM350 module provides four interrupt signals, and the pin definition is as follows:

Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value 8 W_DISABLE1#

25 DPR 26 W_DISABLE2#

I I I Pin Description Level Enable/Disable RF network 3.3/1.8V Dynamic Power Reduction - Body SAR control signal

(SAR_BACK_OFF) GNSS Disable signal Reserved 3.3/1.8V 3.3/1.8V W_DISABLE1#

The module provides a hardware pin to enable/disable WWAN RF function, and the function can also be controlled by the AT command. The module enters the Flight mode after the RF function is disabled. The definition of W_DISABLE1# signal is as below table:

W_DISABLE1# signal Function High/Floating WWAN function is enabled, the module exits the Flight mode. Low WWAN function is disabled, the module enters Flight mode. Note The function of W_DISABLE1# is enabled by default. It can be disabled by customers request. BODYSAR The FM350 module supports Body SAR function by detecting the DPR pin. The voltage level of DPR is high by default, and when the SAR sensor detects the closing human body, the DPR signal will be pulled down. As the result, the module then lowers down its emission power to its default threshold value, thus reducing the RF radiation on the human body. The threshold of emission power can be set by the AT Commands. The definition of DPR signal as shown in the following table:

DPR signal Function High/Floating The module keeps the default emission power Low Lower the maximum emission power to the threshold value of the module. 3.8 ANT Tunable Interface The module supports ANT Tunable interfaces with two different control modes, i.e. MIPI interface and 4bit GPO interface. Through cooperating with external antenna adapter switch via ANT tunable, it can flexibly Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 34 of 59 configure the bands of LTE antenna to improve the antennas working efficiency and save space for the antenna. Module also support 1.8V output for antenna tuner. The pin definition is as below table:

Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Description Level 24 ANT_TUNER_1V8 O 56 RFFE_SCLK O 58 RFFE_SDATA I/O 59 ANTCTL0 61 ANTCTL1 63 ANTCTL2 65 ANTCTL3 O O O O 1.8V power output for antenna tuner, can mux as GPIO. Reserved Tunable ANT control, MIPI Interface, RFFE clock Tunable ANT control, MIPI Interface, RFFE data Tunable ANT control, GPO interface, Bit0 Tunable ANT control, GPO interface, bit1 Tunable ANT control, GPO interface, Bit2 Tunable ANT control, GPO interface, Bit3 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V 1.8V 3.9 Configuration Interface The FM350 module provides four pins for the configuration as the WWAN-PCIe, type M.2 module:

Pin Pin Name I/O Reset Value Pin Description Level 1 CONFIG_3 21 CONFIG_0 69 CONFIG_1 75 CONFIG_2 O O O O

L

NC NC Internally connected to GND NC

The M.2 module configuration as the following table:

Config_0

(pin21) Config_1

(pin69) Config_2

(pin75) Config_3

(pin1) Module Type and Main Host Interface Port Configuration NC GND NC NC WWANPCIe Gen3, USB3.1 Gen1 Vendor defined Please refer to PCI Express M.2 Specification Rev1.2 for more details. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 35 of 59 4 Radio Frequency 4.1 RF Interface RF Interface Functionality The FM350 module supports four RF connectors used for external antenna connection. As the Figure 4-

1 shows, M is for Main antenna, used to receive and transmit RF signals, D/G is for Diversity antenna, used to receive the diversity RF signals. M1 and M2 are used for supporting 4x4 MIMO data transfer. Figure 4-1 RF connectors RF Connector Characteristic Rated Condition Environment Condition Frequency Range DC~6GHz Characteristic Impedance 50 Temperature Range: 40C~+85C Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 36 of 59 RF Connector Dimension FM350 module uses standard M.2 RF connectors. The RF connector part number is 818004607 manufactured by ECT Corporation, and the connector size is 2x2x0.6m. The connector dimension is shown as following picture:

Figure 4-2 RF connector dimensions Figure 4-3 0.81mm coaxial antenna dimensions Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 37 of 59 Figure 4-4 Schematic diagram of 0.81mm coaxial antenna connected to the RF connector RF Connector Assembly Mate RF connector parallel refer Figure 4-5, do not slant mate with strong force. Figure 4-5 Mate RF connector To avoid damage in RF connector unmating, it is recommended using pulling JIG as Figure 4-6, and the pulling JIG must be lifted up vertically to PCB surface (see Figure 4-7 and 4-8). Figure 4-6 Pulling JIG Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 38 of 59 Figure 4-7 Lift up pulling JIG Figure 4-8 Pulling direction 4.2 Operating Band The FM350 module operating bands of the antennas are as follows:

Operating Band Description RAT TX (MHz) RX (MHz) Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 2100MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 1920 - 1980 2110 - 2170 1900MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 1850 - 1910 1930 - 1990 1800MHz LTE FDD 1710 - 1785 1805 - 1880 1700MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 1710 - 1755 2110 - 2155 850MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 824 - 849 869 - 894 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 39 of 59 Operating Band Description RAT TX (MHz) RX (MHz) Band 7 Band 8 2600Mhz LTE FDD 2500 - 2570 2620 - 2690 900MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 880 - 915 925 - 960 Band 12 700MHz LTE FDD 699 - 716 729 - 746 Band 13 700MHz LTE FDD 777 - 787 746 - 756 Band 14 700MHz LTE FDD 788 - 798 758 - 768 Band 17 700MHz LTE FDD 704 - 716 734 - 746 Band 18 800MHz LTE FDD 815 - 830 860 - 875 Band 19 850MHz LTE FDD 830 - 845 875 - 890 Band 20 800MHz LTE FDD 832 - 862 791 - 821 Band 25 1900MHz LTE FDD 1850 - 1915 1930 - 1995 Band 26 850MHz LTE FDD 814 - 849 859 - 894 Band 28 700MHz LTE FDD 703 - 748 758 - 803 Band 29 700MHz LTE FDD N/A 717 - 728 Band 30 2300MHz LTE FDD 2305 - 2315 2350 - 2360 Band 32 1500MHz LTE FDD N/A 1452 - 1496 Band 34 2000MHz LTE TDD Band 38 2600MHz LTE TDD Band 39 1900MHZ LTE TDD Band 40 2300MHz LTE TDD Band 41 2500MHz LTE TDD Band 42 3500MHZ LTE TDD Band 43 3700MHz LTE TDD 2010 -2025 2570 - 2620 1880 - 1920 2300 - 2400 2496 - 2690 3400 - 3600 3600 - 3800 Band 46 5200MHZ LTE TDD N/A 5150 - 5925 Band 48 3600MHz LTE TDD 3550 3700 Band 66 1700MHz LTE FDD 1710 - 1780 2110 - 2200 Band 71 600MHz LTE FDD 663 -698 617 - 652 n1 n2 n3 2100MHz NR FDD 1900MHz 1800MHz NR FDD NR FDD 1920 - 1980 2110 - 2170 1850 - 1910 1930 - 1990 1710 - 1785 1805 - 1880 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 40 of 59 Operating Band Description RAT TX (MHz) RX (MHz) n5 n7 n8 n20 n25 n28 n30 n38 n40 n41 n48 n66 n71 n77 n78 n79 GPS L1 GLONASS G1 Galileo E1 BDS B1

850MHz 2600Mhz 900MHz 800MHz NR FDD NR FDD NR FDD NR FDD 1900MHz NR FDD 700MHz NR FDD 824 - 849 869 - 894 2500 - 2570 2620 - 2690 880 - 915 925 - 960 832 - 862 791 - 821 1850 - 1915 1930 - 1995 703 - 748 758 - 803 2300MHz NR FDD 2305 - 2315 2350 - 2360 2600MHz 2300MHz 2500MHz 3500MHz 1700MHz 600MHz NR TDD NR TDD NR TDD NR TDD NR FDD NR FDD NR TDD NR TDD NR TDD

2570 - 2620 2300 - 2400 2496 - 2690 3550 - 3700 1710 - 1780 2110 - 2200 663 - 698 617 - 652 3300 - 4200 3300 - 3800 4400 - 5000

1575.421.023 1602.56254 1575.422.046 1561.0982.046 4.3 Transmitting Power The transmitting power for each band of the FM350 module as shown in the following table:

RAT Band 3GPP Requirement(dBm) Tx Power(dBm) Note Band 1 24+1.7/-3.7 Band 2 24+1.7/-3.7 WCDMA Band 4 24+1.7/-3.7 Band 5 24+1.7/-3.7 Band 8 24+1.7/-3.7 23.51 23.51 23.51 23.5+1/-1 23.5+1/-1

Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 41 of 59 RAT Band 3GPP Requirement(dBm) Tx Power(dBm) Note Band 1 232.7 Band 2 232.7 Band 3 232.7 Band 4 232.7 231 231 231 231 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Band 5 232.7 23+2/-1 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Band 7 232.7 Band 8 232.7 Band 12 232.7 Band 13 232.7 Band 14 232.7 Band 17 232.7 Band 18 232.7 Band 19 232.7 Band 20 232.7 Band 25 232.7 Band 26 232.7 Band 28 23+2.7/-3.2 Band 30 232.7 Band 34 232.7 Band 38 232.7 Band 39 232.7 Band 40 232.7 LTE 231 23+2/-1 23+2/-1 23+2/-1 23+2/-1 23+2/-1 23+2/-1 23+2/-1 23+2/-1 231 23+2/-1 23+2/-1 221 231 231 231 231 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Band 41 262 26+1/-1 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Band 42 23+3/-4 Band 43 23+3/-4 Band 48 23+2.7/-3.7*

Band 66 232.7 231 231 211 231 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Band 71 232.7 23+2/-1 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB NR n1 232.7 231 15MHz BW, Inner RB Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 42 of 59 RAT Band 3GPP Requirement(dBm) Tx Power(dBm) Note n2 n3 n5 n7 n8 n20 n25 n28 n30 n38 n40 n41 n48 n66 n71 n77 n78 n79 232.7 232.7 232.7 232.7 232.7 232.7 232.7 232.7 NA 232.7 232.7 26+2.7/-3.7 23+2.7/-3.7*

232.7 232.7 232.7 26+3/-4 26+3/-4 231 231 15MHz BW, Inner RB 15MHz BW, Inner RB 23+2/-1 15MHz BW, Inner RB 231 23+2/-1 23+2/-1 231 15MHz BW, Inner RB 15MHz BW, Inner RB 15MHz BW, Inner RB 15MHz BW, Inner RB 23+2/-1 15MHz BW, Inner RB 221 231 231 261 211 231 23+2/-1 25+2/-1 261 261 NA 15MHz BW, Inner RB 15MHz BW, Inner RB 60MHz BW, Inner RB NA 20MHz BW, Inner RB 10MHz BW, Inner RB 50MHz BW, Inner RB 50MHz BW, Inner RB 60MHz BW, Inner RB 4.4 Antenna Design The FM350 module provides four antenna interfaces, and the antenna design requirements is shown in the following table:

FM350 module Main antenna requirements Frequency range The most proper antenna to adapt the frequencies should be used. Bandwidth(WCDMA) WCDMA band 1(2100): 250MHz WCDMA band 2(1900): 140MHz WCDMA band 4(1700): 445MHz WCDMA band 5(850): 70MHz WCDMA band 8(900): 80MHz Bandwidth(LTE) LTE band 1(2100):

250MHz Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 43 of 59 FM350 module Main antenna requirements LTE band 2(1900): 140MHz LTE Band 3(1800): 170MHz LTE band 4(1700): 445MHz LTE band 5(850): 70MHz LTE band 7(2600): 190MHz LTE Band 8(900): 80MHz LTE band 12(700): 47MHz LTE band 13(700): 41MHz LTE band 14(700): 40MHz LTE band 17(700): 42MHz LTE band 18(800): 80MHz LTE band 19(850) : 80MHz LTE band 20(800): 71MHz LTE band 25(1900): 145MHz LTE band 26(850): 80MHz LTE band 28(700): 100MHz LTE band 29(700): 11MHz LTE band 30(2300): 55MHz LTE band 32(1500): 44MHz LTE band 34(2000): 15MHz LTE band 38(2600): 50MHz LTE band 39(1900): 40MHz LTE band 40(2300): 100MHz LTE band 41(2500): 110MHz LTE band 42(3500): 200MHz LTE band 43(3700): 200MHz LTE band 46(5500): 775MHz LTE band 48(3600): 150MHz LTE band 66(1700): 490MHz LTE band 71(600): 81MHz n1(2100): 250MHz n2(1900): 140MHz n3(1800): 170MHz n5(850): 70MHz n7(2600): 190MHz n8(900): 80MHz n20(800): 71MHz n25(1900): 145MHz n30(2300): 55MHz n28(700): 100MHz n38(2600): 50MHz n40(2300): 100MHz n41(2500): 110MHz n66(1700): 490MHz n71(600): 35MHz n77(3750): 900MHz NR Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 44 of 59 FM350 module Main antenna requirements n78(3500): 500MHz n79(5500): 600MHz GPS: 2MHz GLONASS: 8MHz Galileo: 8MHz BDS: 4MHz 50

> 28dBm average power WCDMA & LTE & NR Bandwidth(GNSS) Impedance Input power Recommended standing-wave ratio (SWR) 2:1 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 45 of 59 5 ESD Characteristics The module is generally not protected against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). ESD handling precautions that apply to ESD sensitive components should be strictly followed. Proper ESD handling procedures must be applied throughout the processing, handling, assembly and operation of any application with module. The ESD characteristics are shown in the following table (Temperature: 25C, Relative Humidity:

40%). Interface GND Antenna Interface Golden Finger Note Contact Discharge Air Discharge 8 kV 8 kV 2 kV 15 kV NA NA ESD performance is based on EVB-M2 development board. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 46 of 59 6 Structure Specification 6.1 Product Appearance The product appearance for FM350 module is shown in Figure 6-1:

Figure 6-1 Module appearance 6.2 Dimension of Structure The structural dimension of the FM350 module is shown in Figure 6-2:

Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 47 of 59 Figure 6-2 Dimension of structure (unit: mm) 6.3 M.2 Interface Model The FM350 M.2 module adopts 75-pin gold finger as external interface, where 67 pins are signal pins and 8 pins are notch pins as shown in Figure 3-1. For module dimension, please refer to Figure 6-2 Dimension of Structure. Based on the M.2 interface definition, FM350 module adopts Type 3052-S3-B interface (30x52mm, the component maximum height on t top layer is 1.5mm, PCB thickness is 0.8mm, and KEY ID is B). Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 48 of 59 Figure 6-3 M.2 interface model 6.4 M.2 Connector FM350 module connects with host by M.2 connector which is built in host. The recommended part number is APCI0026-P001A manufactured by LOTES Corporation, and the dimensions is shown in Figure 6-4. The package of connector, please refer to the specification. Figure 6-4 M.2 Dimension of structure Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 49 of 59 6.5 Storage Storage Life Storage Conditions (recommended): Temperature is 23 5 , relative humidity is less than RH 60%. Storage period: Under the recommended storage conditions, the storage life is 12 months. 6.6 Packing The FM350 module uses the tray sealed packing, combined with the outer packing method using the hard cartoon box, so that the storage, transportation and the usage of modules can be protected to the greatest extent. Note The module is a precision electronic product, and may suffer permanent damage if no correct electrostatic protection measures are taken. Tray Package The FM350 module uses tray package, 20 pcs are packed in each tray, with 5 trays including one empty tray on top in each box and 5 boxes in each case. Tray packaging process is shown in Figure 6-5:

Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 50 of 59 Figure 6-5 Tray packaging process Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 51 of 59 Tray size The pallet size is 330x170x6.5mm, and is shown in Figure 6-6:

Figure 6-6 Tray size (Unit: mm) Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 52 of 59 7 CE Conformance information The device could be used with a separation distance of 20cm to the human body. Hereby, [Fibocom Wireless Inc.] declares that the radio equipment type [FM350-GL] is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. 8 FCC Conformance information Important Notice to OEM integrators 1. This module is limited to OEM installation ONLY. 2. This module is limited to installation in mobile applications, according to Part 2.1091(b). 3. The separate approval is required for all other operating configurations, including portable configurations with respect to Part 2.1093 and different antenna configurations 4. For FCC Part 15.31 (h) and (k): The host manufacturer is responsible for additional testing to verify compliance as a composite system. When testing the host device for compliance with Part 15 Subpart B, the host manufacturer is required to show compliance with Part 15 Subpart B while the transmitter module(s) are installed and operating. The modules should be transmitting and the evaluation should confirm that the module's intentional emissions are compliant (i.e. fundamental and out of band emissions). The host manufacturer must verify that there are no additional unintentional emissions other than what is permitted in Part 15 Subpart B or emissions are complaint with the transmitter(s) rule(s). The Grantee will provide guidance to the host manufacturer for Part 15 B requirements if needed. Important Note notice that any deviation(s) from the defined parameters of the antenna trace, as described by the instructions, require that the host product manufacturer must notify to Fibocom Wireless Inc. that they wish to change the antenna trace design. In this case, a Class II permissive change application is required to be filed by the USI, or the host manufacturer can take responsibility through the change in FCC ID (new application) procedure followed by a Class II permissive change application. End Product Labeling When the module is installed in the host device, the FCC/IC ID label must be visible through a window on the final device or it must be visible when an access panel, door or cover is easily re-moved. If not, a Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 53 of 59 second label must be placed on the outside of the final device that contains the following text: Contains FCC ID:ZMOFM350GL Contains IC: 21374-FM350GL The FCC ID/IC ID can be used only when all FCC/IC compliance requirements are met. Antenna Installation

(1) The antenna must be installed such that 20 cm is maintained between the antenna and users,

(2) The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna.

(3) Only antennas of the same type and with equal or less gains as shown below may be used with this module. Other types of antennas and/or higher gain antennas may require additional authorization for operation. Antenna Type Bands Peak Gain Antenna Type Bands Peak Gain PIFA WCDMA B2 WCDMA B4 WCDMA B5 LTE B2 LTE B4 LTE B5 LTE B7 LTE B12 LTE B13 LTE B14 LTE B17 LTE B25 LTE B26 LTE B30 LTE B38 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 4 3 1 4 PIFA LTE B41 LTE B48 LTE B66 LTE B71 5G NR n2 5G NR n5 5G NR n7 5G NR n25 5G NR n30 5G NR n38 5G NR n41 5G NR n66 5G NR n71 5G NR n77 5G NR n78 5G NR n48 4 1 3 3 4 3 4 4 1 4 4 3 3 3 3 1 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 54 of 59 Antenna Type Bands Peak Gain Antenna Type Bands Peak Gain Monopole WCDMA B2 WCDMA B4 WCDMA B5 LTE B2 LTE B4 LTE B5 LTE B7 LTE B12 LTE B13 LTE B14 LTE B17 LTE B25 LTE B26 LTE B30 LTE B38 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 4 3 1 4 Monopole LTE B41 LTE B48 LTE B66 LTE B71 5G NR n2 5G NR n5 5G NR n7 5G NR n25 5G NR n30 5G NR n38 5G NR n41 5G NR n66 5G NR n71 5G NR n77 5G NR n78 4 1 3 3 4 3 4 4 1 4 4 3 3 3 3 In the event that these conditions cannot be met (for example certain laptop configurations or co-location with another transmitter), then the FCC/IC authorization is no longer considered valid and the FCC ID/IC ID cannot be used on the final product. In these circumstances, the OEM integrator will be responsible for re-evaluating the end product (including the transmitter) and obtaining a separate FCC/IC authorization. Manual Information to the End User The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 55 of 59 to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. List of applicable FCC rules This module has been tested and found to comply with part 22, part 24, part 27, part 90,part 96, part 15B requirements for Modular Approval. The modular transmitter is only FCC authorized for the specific rule parts (i.e., FCC transmitter rules) listed on the grant, and that the host product manufacturer is responsible for compliance to any other FCC rules that apply to the host not covered by the modular transmitter grant of certification. If the grantee markets their product as being Part 15 Subpart B compliant (when it also contains unintentional-radiator digital circuity), then the grantee shall provide a notice stating that the final host product still requires Part 15 Subpart B compliance testing with the modular transmitter installed. This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions: (For module device use) 1) The antenna must be installed such that 20 cm is maintained between the antenna and users, and 2) The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna. As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 56 of 59 Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator &

your body. 9 ISED Conformance information Industry Canada Statement This device complies with Industry Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference; and

(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement."

Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator & your body. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements ISED tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 57 of 59 This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions: (For module device use) 1) The antenna must be installed such that 20 cm is maintained between the antenna and users, and 2) The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna. As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed. Cet appareil est conu uniquement pour les intgrateurs OEM dans les conditions suivantes: (Pour utilisation de dispositif module) 1) L'antenne doit tre installe de telle sorte qu'une distance de 20 cm est respecte entre l'antenne et les utilisateurs, et 2) Le module metteur peut ne pas tre complant avec un autre metteur ou antenne. Tant que les 2 conditions ci-dessus sont remplies, des essais supplmentaires sur l'metteur ne seront pas ncessaires. Toutefois, l'intgrateur OEM est toujours responsable des essais sur son produit final pour toutes exigences de conformit supplmentaires requis pour ce module install. IMPORTANT NOTE:

In the event that these conditions can not be met (for example certain laptop configurations or colocation with another transmitter), then the Canada authorization is no longer considered valid and the IC ID can not be used on the final product. In these circumstances, the OEM integrator will be responsible for re-

evaluating the end product (including the transmitter) and obtaining a separate Canada authorization. NOTE IMPORTANTE:

Dans le cas o ces conditions ne peuvent tre satisfaites (par exemple pour certaines configurations d'ordinateur portable ou de certaines co-localisation avec un autre metteur), l'autorisation du Canada n'est plus considr comme valide et l'ID IC ne peut pas tre utilis sur le produit final. Dans ces circonstances, l'intgrateur OEM sera charg de rvaluer le produit final (y compris l'metteur) et l'obtention d'une autorisation distincte au Canada. End Product Labeling This transmitter module is authorized only for use in device where the antenna may be installed such that 20 cm may be maintained between the antenna and users. The final end product must be Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 58 of 59 labeled in a visible area with the following: Contains IC:21374-FM350GL. Plaque signaltique du produit final Ce module metteur est autoris uniquement pour une utilisation dans un dispositif o l'antenne peut tre installe de telle sorte qu'une distance de 20cm peut tre maintenue entre l'antenne et les utilisateurs. Le produit final doit tre tiquet dans un endroit visible avec l'inscription suivante:

"Contient des IC: 21374-FM350GL". Manual Information To the End User The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. Manuel d'information l'utilisateur final L'intgrateur OEM doit tre conscient de ne pas fournir des informations l'utilisateur final quant la faon d'installer ou de supprimer ce module RF dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit final qui intgre ce module. Le manuel de l'utilisateur final doit inclure toutes les informations rglementaires requises et avertissements comme indiqu dans ce manuel. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. FM350-GL Hardware Guide Page 59 of 59

Label information ModelHSN-I49C-4 1. Images of the e-label screen are provided below:

RMNHSN-I49C-4 Contains Fibocom Model:FM350-GL Contains FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL Contains IC: 21374-FM350GL 2. The information that will be displayed on the e-label and information that will remain in the user manual is shown below:

FCC ID/IC number Information on E-label In Manual Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.) Class A / B Digital Device user manual statements1 Yes No No Yes No Yes 3. Users are able to access the information in no more than three steps in a devices menu. The actual Steps are: Choose esc or F10 > Advanced > Electronic Labels No special access codes or permissions are required to go through the above steps beyond entering a user-defined password to protect against unauthorized access to the device. 4. The information is stored on the device, no special accessories or supplemental plug-ins

(e.g., a SIM/USIM card) are required to access the information. No. 5. Users are provided specific instructions on how to access the information. Yes. 6. The above information must be programmed by the responsible party and the information must be secured in such a manner that third-parties cannot modify it. The e-label information is pre-programmed by the manufacturer. The user cannot modify the e-label information. 7. A packaging label will be applied.

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/7014938.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Label information ModelHSN-I49C-3 1. Images of the e-label screen are provided below:

RMN-HSN-I49C-3 Contains Fibocom Model: FM350-GL Contains FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL Contains IC: 21374-FM350GL 2. The information that will be displayed on the e-label and information that will remain in the user manual is shown below:

FCC ID/IC number Information on E-label In Manual Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.) Class A / B Digital Device user manual statements1 Yes No No Yes No Yes 3. Users are able to access the information in no more than three steps in a devices menu. The actual Steps are: Choose esc or F10 > Advanced > Electronic Labels No special access codes or permissions are required to go through the above steps beyond entering a user-defined password to protect against unauthorized access to the device. 4. The information is stored on the device, no special accessories or supplemental plug-ins

(e.g., a SIM/USIM card) are required to access the information. Yes. 5. Users are provided specific instructions on how to access the information. Yes. 6. The above information must be programmed by the responsible party and the information must be secured in such a manner that third-parties cannot modify it. The e-label information is pre-programmed by the manufacturer. The user cannot modify the e-label formation. 7. When e-labeling is used, a physical temporary label is also required on the product, or a label on the packaging, at the time of importation, marketing, and sales. The physical label will be on the packaging box.

TO:

Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MID 21046 Regarding FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL To whom it may concern:

Date: December 18, 2023 We, the undersigned, hereby authorize Jim Chang, SGS Taiwan Ltd. to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization with respect to the FCC ID above, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by the agent on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862. Further, no party, as defined in 47 CFR 1.2002 (b), to the application is subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits. We also declare that the information provided to the FCC is true and correct to the best of our knowledge

(47 CFR 2.911(d)) and we have been informed of the grantee responsibilities (47 CFR 2.909) with regard to certified equipment. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely, Signature: ____________________ Printed Name /Title: Patrick Ma/ Certification Manager Company Name: Fibocom Wireless Inc.

1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International, Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Fibocom Wireless Inc. ShenZhen, China Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Certification designating a U.S. agent for service of process pursuant to Part 2.911(d)(7) To whom it may concern,

[Fibocom Wireless Inc. Grantee Code ZMO, FRN:0020891057] (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of application, [Fibocom Wireless USA] (the agent) is designated as the U.S. agent for the purpose of accepting service of process on behalf of the applicant. The information of agent are:

U.S. Agent: Fibocom Wireless USA FCC Registration Number (FRN): 0033437914 Physical U.S. address: 5909 Peachtree Dunwoody Rd Ste 910 Atlanta, GA 30328 United States Contact: Lei Yao Phone: +01 (469)463-6983 Email: Lei.yao@fibocom.com The applicant accepts to maintain an agent for service of process in the United States for no less than one year after either the grantee has permanently terminated all marketing and importation of the applicable equipment within the U.S., or the conclusion of any Commission-related administrative or judicial proceeding involving the equipment, whichever is later. The agent accepts the designation by (the applicant) as the U.S. agent to accept service of process includes, but is not limited to, delivery of any correspondence, notices, orders, decisions, and requirements of administrative, legal, or judicial process related to Commission proceedings. Signed by the Applicant Signed by the Agent Name: Patrick Ma Email: mapx@fibocom.com Date: April 21, 2023 Name: Lei Yao Email: Lei.yao@fibocom.com Date: April 21, 2023

Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA Date: December 18, 2023 Ref: Attestation Statements Part 2.911(d)(5)(i)&(ii) Filing FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(i)

[Fibocom Wireless Inc.] (the applicant) certifies that the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(ii)

[Fibocom Wireless Inc.] (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List as a specifically named entity or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates that producing covered equipment. Sincerely, Signature: ____________________ Printed Name /Title: Patrick Ma/ Manager Company Name: Fibocom Wireless Inc.

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/7021073.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Date: December 27, 2023 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Requesting Class II permissive change To Whom It May Concern:

The purpose of this letter is to request a Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL, Original grant date: refer below dates 10/12/2021 for PCB (C2PC enabling n77/78) 03/16/2023 for PCB (C2PC integrated in HSN-I49C-6) 05/26/2023 for CBE (C2PC enabling n48) 03/16/2023 for CBE (C2PC integrated in HSN-I49C-6) The major change filed under this application is 1. Integrating the modular transmitter in the host HSN-I49C-6. 2. Enabling n77 & n78 operation in 3450~3550MHz via software. 3. Enabling n48 via software. 4. Disabling TAS for n71/ LTE B71 via software. Sincerely, _______ ____(Signature) Name: Jim Chang Title: Manager On behalf of: SGS Taiwan Ltd. Telephone: +886 2 2299 3279 Email:

jim.chang@sgs.com

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/7014930.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International, Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, ShenZhen, China Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Date: December 26, 2023 Subject: Certifications concerning covered equipment pursuant to Part 2.911(d)(5)(i) and (ii) To whom it may concern, Fibocom Wireless Inc. (the applicant) certifies that the equipment FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. Fibocom Wireless Inc. (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List (as a specifically named entity or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates) as an entity producing covered equipment. Sincerely, ________________________ Printed Name /Title: Patrick Ma/ Certification Manager Company Name: Fibocom Wireless Inc.

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/7014932.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case 1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International, Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Fibocom Wireless Inc. ShenZhen, China Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Certification designating a U.S. agent for service of process pursuant to Part 2.911(d)(7) To whom it may concern,

[Fibocom Wireless Inc. Grantee Code ZMO, FRN:0020891057] (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of application, [Fibocom Wireless USA] (the agent) is designated as the U.S. agent for the purpose of accepting service of process on behalf of the applicant. The information of agent are:

U.S. Agent: Fibocom Wireless USA FCC Registration Number (FRN): 0033437914 Physical U.S. address: 5909 Peachtree Dunwoody Rd Ste 910 Atlanta, GA 30328 United States Contact: Lei Yao Phone: +01 (469)463-6983 Email: Lei.yao@fibocom.com The applicant accepts to maintain an agent for service of process in the United States for no less than one year after either the grantee has permanently terminated all marketing and importation of the applicable equipment within the U.S., or the conclusion of any Commission-related administrative or judicial proceeding involving the equipment, whichever is later. The agent accepts the designation by (the applicant) as the U.S. agent to accept service of process includes, but is not limited to, delivery of any correspondence, notices, orders, decisions, and requirements of administrative, legal, or judicial process related to Commission proceedings. Signed by the Applicant Signed by the Agent Name: Patrick Ma Email: mapx@fibocom.com Date: April 21, 2023 Name: Lei Yao Email: Lei.yao@fibocom.com Date: April 21, 2023

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/7014933.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International, Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, ShenZhen, China Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 December 26, 2023 FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046 SUBJECT: Class II Permissive Change for FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL, Model: FM350-GL The 5G Module has been granted by FCC dated 05/26/2023 (CBE) under FCC ID:

ZMOFM350GL. The intention of this application is to enable the modular certified FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL to be integrated in HP Notebook Computer HSN-I49C-3. Comparing to the previous granted filing on 03/14/2023 for the dedicated host, this filing enables the Sub-6 n48 operation is via embedded software. The module installed into host platform mentioned above is electronically and mechanically identical to the original certified module. The Original FCC testing on module under FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL was performed with an antenna of higher gain, and the antenna was connected to the module in an open environment. The current host platform under application uses an antenna with lower gain and is installed inside the host platform enclosure. The physical restraints introduced by the host platform should have resulted in equal or lower level of radiated emission. Therefore, additional Radiated emission testing is not necessary. Sincerely yours, Printed Name /Title: Patrick Ma/ Certification Manager Company Name: Fibocom Wireless Inc.

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/7014934.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case 1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International, Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, ShenZhen, China Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Fibocom Wireless Inc. Date: December 26, 2023 FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following documents from public disclosure indefinitely. Tune-up Procedure Above mentioned documents which contain detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices, we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following documents for 180 days after the grant of equipment authorization is issued:

External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, _______________________ Printed Name /Title: Patrick Ma/ Certification Manager Company Name: Fibocom Wireless Inc.

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/7014935.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International, Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, ShenZhen, China Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Date: December 26, 2023 To whom it may concern, Please be notified that I, Patrick Ma, have designated Sporton International Inc. as the agent being responsible for this project and to sign the form 731 and other documentation. Any and all acts carried out by Sporton International Inc. on the matters of relating to all processes required in the FCC approval and any communication needed with the national authority, shall have the same legal authority as acts on our own behalf. We further certify that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002 (b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862. This authorization is limited to the product of as following:

FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL If you have any acknowledgement and response, please send it to Sporton International Inc. directly. Sincerely yours, ________________________ Printed Name /Title: Patrick Ma/ Certification Manager Company Name: Fibocom Wireless Inc.

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6599726.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Fibocom Wireless Inc. Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Date: June 13, 2023 Subject: Certifications concerning covered equipment pursuant to Part 2.911(d)(5)(i) and (ii) To whom it may concern, Fibocom Wireless Inc. certifies that the equipment FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. Fibocom Wireless Inc. certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List ( as a specifically named entity or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates) as an entity producing covered equipment. Sincerely, ________________________ Contact Person: Patrick Ma E-mail: mapx@fibocom.com

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6599727.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case 1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International, Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Fibocom Wireless Inc. ShenZhen, China Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Certification designating a U.S. agent for service of process pursuant to Part 2.911(d)(7) To whom it may concern,

[Fibocom Wireless Inc. Grantee Code ZMO] (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of application, [Fibocom Wireless USA] (the agent) is designated as the U.S. agent for the purpose of accepting service of process on behalf of the applicant. The information of agent are:

U.S. Agent: Fibocom Wireless USA FCC Registration Number (FRN): 0033437914 Physical U.S. address: 5909 Peachtree Dunwoody Rd Ste 910 Atlanta, GA 30328 United States Contact: Lei Yao Phone: +01 (469)463-6983 Email: Lei.yao@fibocom.com The applicant accepts to maintain an agent for service of process in the United States for no less than one year after either the grantee has permanently terminated all marketing and importation of the applicable equipment within the U.S., or the conclusion of any Commission-related administrative or judicial proceeding involving the equipment, whichever is later. The agent accepts the designation by (the applicant) as the U.S. agent to accept service of process includes, but is not limited to, delivery of any correspondence, notices, orders, decisions, and requirements of administrative, legal, or judicial process related to Commission proceedings. Signed by the Applicant Signed by the Agent Name: Patrick Ma Email: mapx@fibocom.com Date: April 21, 2023 Name: Lei Yao Email: Lei.yao@fibocom.com Date: April 21, 2023

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6599729.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Fibocom Wireless Inc. Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 1435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 SUBJECT: Class II Permissive Change for FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II Permissive Change for FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL, Model:

FM350-GL (approval date: 05/26/2023) Now we, Fibocom Wireless Inc.would like to modify the authorized equipment for below changes:

Add new PCB Vendor bomin, which the layout is same as the original. Add new Memory supplier, model name: JSFCCA5QHAFGA-405A, manufacturer: JSC/eSMT, which the new memory is pin-for-pin compatible. Add new RF Switch supplier, model name: CAN1024N & CAN1488N, manufacturer: Canaantek, which the new RF Switch is pin-for-pin compatible, has the same basic function and no change in radio parameters has occurred, also the same conditions apply of the PCB is replaced with an equivalent RF switch. Add new Filter supplier, model name: RFBPF1608060KG8D1T, manufacturer:

Walsin, which the new filter is pin-for-pin compatible, has the same basic function and no change in radio parameters has occurred, also the same conditions apply of the PCB is replaced with an equivalent filter. Add new thermos sensitive crystal supplier, which the new crystal component is pin-for-pin compatible, has the same basic function and no change in radio parameters has occurred, also the same conditions apply of the PCB is replaced with an equivalent crystal, the specification is the same with original. Except for the change above, no other modification is performed. Also, the change does not have any impact on the approved radio parameter such as power, frequency range, modulation etc. Sincerely, Contact Person: Patrick Ma E-mail: mapx@fibocom.com

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6599730.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan,Shenzhen,China Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Date: June 13, 2023 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Confidentiality Request regarding application for certification of FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:

Parts List The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that pursuant to Section 0.457 of the Rules, disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely, ________________________ Contact Person: Patrick Ma E-mail: mapx@fibocom.com Rev. 1/1/03

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6599731.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan,Shenzhen,China Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Power of Attorney Date: June 13, 2023 To whom it may concern, Please be notified that I, Patrick Ma, have designated Jim Tsai in Sporton International Inc. as the person being responsible for this project and to sign the form 731 and other documentation. Any and all acts carried out by Jim Tsai in Sporton International Inc., on the matters of relating to all processes required in the FCC approval and any communication needed with the national authority, shall have the same legal authority as acts on our own behalf. We further certifies that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002 (b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1998, 21 U.S.C 862. This authorization is limited to the product of as following:

FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL If you have any acknowledgement and response, please send it to Sporton International Inc. directly. Should you have any questions or comments regarding this matter, please have my best attention. Sincerely yours, ____ Contact Person: Patrick Ma E-mail: mapx@fibocom.com

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6599732.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan,Shenzhen,China Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Date: June 13, 2023 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division RE

: Certification Application FCC ID : ZMOFM350GL To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to sections 0.457 and 0.459 of CFR 47, Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy and to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public, the applicant requests the following documents contained in this certification application be temporarily withheld from public disclosure for an initial period of 180 days:

Test set-up photos External Photos Internal Photos The application contains technical information, which Fibocom Wireless Inc. deems to be trade secrets and proprietary. If made public, the information might be used to the disadvantage of the applicant in the market place. The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application Sincerely, ____ Contact Person: Patrick Ma E-mail: mapx@fibocom.com 1/1

Fibocom Wireless Inc. To: Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA Date: 2023/05/20 Attestation Section 2.911(d)(5) (i) (ii)

(KDB 986446 D01 Covered Equipment)

[Fibocom Wireless Inc.] certifies that the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules.

[Fibocom Wireless Inc.] certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, the applicant [ is not] identified on the Covered List as an entity producing covered equipment. Type of Equipment subject to FCC Certification:

FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL If you have any questions, please feel free to contact me Contact Person:

Position in the Company: Company Representative Date of Signature:

2023/05/20 Patrick Ma ___________________________ Signatory

(signature of the applicant)

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6551020.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case 1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International, Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Fibocom Wireless Inc. ShenZhen, China Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Certification designating a U.S. agent for service of process pursuant to Part 2.911(d)(7) To whom it may concern,

[Fibocom Wireless Inc. Grantee Code ZMO] (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of application, [Fibocom Wireless USA] (the agent) is designated as the U.S. agent for the purpose of accepting service of process on behalf of the applicant. The information of agent are:

U.S. Agent: Fibocom Wireless USA FCC Registration Number (FRN): 0033437914 Physical U.S. address: 5909 Peachtree Dunwoody Rd Ste 910 Atlanta, GA 30328 United States Contact: Lei Yao Phone: +01 (469)463-6983 Email: Lei.yao@fibocom.com The applicant accepts to maintain an agent for service of process in the United States for no less than one year after either the grantee has permanently terminated all marketing and importation of the applicable equipment within the U.S., or the conclusion of any Commission-related administrative or judicial proceeding involving the equipment, whichever is later. The agent accepts the designation by (the applicant) as the U.S. agent to accept service of process includes, but is not limited to, delivery of any correspondence, notices, orders, decisions, and requirements of administrative, legal, or judicial process related to Commission proceedings. Signed by the Applicant Signed by the Agent Name: Patrick Ma Email: mapx@fibocom.com Date: April 21, 2023 Name: Lei Yao Email: Lei.yao@fibocom.com Date: April 21, 2023

Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101, Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Shenzhen, China Request for Class II Permissive Change FCC IDZMOFM350GL Date2023-05-10 Dear Sir/Madam, Subject: FCC Class permission change for FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL Original Grant Date: 04/08/2021 This project is a CIIPC submission to our product: 5G module, model: FM350-GL, the device is identical to the previous certified except for the changes as below:

Model name FM350-GL Original software disable 5G NR N48 Original Software Version 81600.0000.00.09.03.03 New Remark software open 5G NR N48 The hardware is exactly the same, New Software Version without any changes The test strategy reference is as follows:

Case Part 96 Part 2.1091 Thank you. Sincerely. 81600.0000.00.29.22.06 Remark 5G NR N48 RF and SAS full test RF Exposure Evaluation add N48 Date:

City:

2023/05/10.. Shenzhen .. Name:

Patrick Ma.. (2) Email:

mapx@fibocom.com . Signature:

Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101, Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Shenzhen, China

Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101, Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Shenzhen, China Date: May 24, 2023 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachment(s) as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Operational Description Tune-up Procedure Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachment(s) for 180 days after the grant as outlined in Public Notice DA 04-1705. Test Setup Photos User Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, Name:

Patrick Ma.. (2) Email:

mapx@fibocom.com . Signature:

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6551024.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case RF_734_02 04 April 16 Modular Approval Request FCC (KDB 996369 D01 & Part 15.212) FCC ID: ZMOFM350GL Items to be covered by Single modular transmitters. 1. The modular transmitter must have its own RF shielding. 2. The modular transmitter must have buffered modulation/data inputs (if such inputs are provided) to ensure that the module will comply with Part 15 requirements under conditions of excessive data rates or over-modulation. Answer from applicant Yes, please see exhibition external photos Yes, the modular has buffer modulation /data inputs 3. The modular transmitter must have its own power supply regulation. Yes, please see the SCH.pdf 4. The modular transmitter must comply with the antenna requirements of Section 15.203 and 15.204(b)(c). The antenna must either be permanently attached or employ a unique antenna coupler (at all connections between the module and the antenna, including the cable). 5. The modular transmitter must be tested in a stand-alone configuration, i.e., the module must not be inside another device during testing. This is intended to demonstrate that the module is capable of complying with Part 15 emission limits regardless of the device into which it is eventually installed. 6. The modular transmitter must be equipped with either a permanently affixed label or must be capable of electronically displaying its FCC identification number in accordance with 15.212 (a)(1)(vi)(A) / (B). 7. The modular transmitter must comply with any specific rule or operating requirements applicable to the transmitter and the manufacturer must provide adequate instructions along with the module to explain any such requirements. A copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. For example, there are very strict operational and timing requirements that must be met before a transmitter is authorized for operation under Section 15.231. For instance, data transmission is prohibited, except for operation under Section 15.231(e), in which case there are separate field strength level and timing requirements. Compliance with these requirements must be assured. 8. The modular transmitter must comply with any applicable RF exposure requirements. For example, FCC Rules in Sections 1.1310, 2.1091, 2.1093, and specific Sections of Part 15, including 15.319(i), 15.407(f), 15.253(f) and 15.255(g), require that Unlicensed PCS, UNII and millimeter wave devices perform routine environmental evaluation for RF Exposure to demonstrate compliance. In addition, spread spectrum transmitters operating under Section 15.247 are required to address RF Exposure compliance. Modular transmitters approved under other Sections of Part 15, when necessary, may also need to address certain RF Exposure concerns, typically by providing specific installation and operating instructions for users, installers and other interested parties to ensure compliance. Yes, the requirements of antenna connector and spurious emission have been fulfilled. Please refer to the test report exhibition. Yes, please refer to the setup photo exhibition for the stand-alone configuration Yes, the module will be label with its own FCC ID, and the instruction on the labelling rule of the end product has been stated in the user manual of this module. Please refer to the label and user manual exhibition. Yes, the required FCC rule has been fulfilled and all the instruction for maintaining compliance have been clearly stated in the user manual. Yes, please refer exhibition RF exposure for the compliance of MPE RF exposure rule. Note: A limited modular approval (LMA) may be granted for single modular transmitters that comply partially with the requirements above. RF_734_02 04 April 16 Name and surname of applicant (or authorized representative):

Signature:

Date:

City:

Name:

Email:

2023/05/10.. Shenzhen .. Patrick Ma.. (2) mapx@fibocom.com . Signature:

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6551021.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case RF_160, Issue 04 Fibocom Wireless Inc. Declaration of Authorization We Name:

Address:

Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101, Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Shenzhen, China City:

Country:

Shenzhen China Declare that:

Name Representative of agent: Well Wei Agent Company name:

Address:

Park, Suzhou Area, China (Jiangsu) Pilot Free Trade Zone City:

Country Suzhou China SGS-CSTC Standards Technical Services (Suzhou) Co., Ltd South of No. 6 Plant, No. 1, Runsheng Road, Suzhou Industrial is authorized to apply for Certification of the following product(s):

Product description: 5G Module Type designation: FM350-GL FIBOCOM Trademark:

on our behalf. Date:

City:

Name:

Email:

2023/05/10.. Shenzhen .. Patrick Ma.. (2) mapx@fibocom.com . Signature:

Notes:

(1): Required for FCC application

(2): For FCC it must be the Grantee Code owner or the authorized agent.